US20110157326A1 - Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery - Google Patents

Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20110157326A1
US20110157326A1 US12/982,330 US98233010A US2011157326A1 US 20110157326 A1 US20110157326 A1 US 20110157326A1 US 98233010 A US98233010 A US 98233010A US 2011157326 A1 US2011157326 A1 US 2011157326A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
circuitry
content
dimensional
viewing content
view
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/982,330
Inventor
Jeyhan Karaoguz
James D. Bennett
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Avago Technologies International Sales Pte Ltd
Original Assignee
Broadcom Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to US12/982,330 priority Critical patent/US20110157326A1/en
Application filed by Broadcom Corp filed Critical Broadcom Corp
Assigned to BROADCOM CORPORATION reassignment BROADCOM CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KARAOGUZ, JEYHAN, BENNETT, JAMES D.
Publication of US20110157326A1 publication Critical patent/US20110157326A1/en
Priority to US13/220,601 priority patent/US8897377B2/en
Priority to US13/285,861 priority patent/US20120047535A1/en
Priority to US13/285,779 priority patent/US20120044987A1/en
Priority to US13/285,644 priority patent/US9406252B2/en
Priority to US14/551,216 priority patent/US9351010B2/en
Assigned to BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT reassignment BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT Assignors: BROADCOM CORPORATION
Assigned to AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. reassignment AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BROADCOM CORPORATION
Assigned to BROADCOM CORPORATION reassignment BROADCOM CORPORATION TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS Assignors: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/361Reproducing mixed stereoscopic images; Reproducing mixed monoscopic and stereoscopic images, e.g. a stereoscopic image overlay window on a monoscopic image background
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B35/00Stereoscopic photography
    • G03B35/18Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing
    • G03B35/24Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing using apertured or refractive resolving means on screens or between screen and eye
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/001Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background
    • G09G3/003Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background to produce spatial visual effects
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/106Processing image signals
    • H04N13/139Format conversion, e.g. of frame-rate or size
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/106Processing image signals
    • H04N13/161Encoding, multiplexing or demultiplexing different image signal components
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/189Recording image signals; Reproducing recorded image signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/194Transmission of image signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/305Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using lenticular lenses, e.g. arrangements of cylindrical lenses
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • H04N13/312Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being placed behind the display panel, e.g. between backlight and spatial light modulator [SLM]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • H04N13/315Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being time-variant
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/332Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/349Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking
    • H04N13/351Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking for displaying simultaneously
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/356Image reproducers having separate monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
    • H04N13/359Switching between monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/366Image reproducers using viewer tracking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/366Image reproducers using viewer tracking
    • H04N13/383Image reproducers using viewer tracking for tracking with gaze detection, i.e. detecting the lines of sight of the viewer's eyes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/398Synchronisation thereof; Control thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/235Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • H04N21/4122Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices additional display device, e.g. video projector
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/435Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04SSTEREOPHONIC SYSTEMS 
    • H04S7/00Indicating arrangements; Control arrangements, e.g. balance control
    • H04S7/30Control circuits for electronic adaptation of the sound field
    • H04S7/302Electronic adaptation of stereophonic sound system to listener position or orientation
    • H04S7/303Tracking of listener position or orientation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/033Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
    • G06F3/0346Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of the device orientation or free movement in a 3D space, e.g. 3D mice, 6-DOF [six degrees of freedom] pointers using gyroscopes, accelerometers or tilt-sensors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/02Composition of display devices
    • G09G2300/023Display panel composed of stacked panels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/028Improving the quality of display appearance by changing the viewing angle properties, e.g. widening the viewing angle, adapting the viewing angle to the view direction
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2370/00Aspects of data communication
    • G09G2370/04Exchange of auxiliary data, i.e. other than image data, between monitor and graphics controller
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/003Details of a display terminal, the details relating to the control arrangement of the display terminal and to the interfaces thereto
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/14Display of multiple viewports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N2013/40Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
    • H04N2013/403Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being monoscopic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N2013/40Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
    • H04N2013/405Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being stereoscopic or three dimensional

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to techniques for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content.
  • Images may be generated for display in various forms.
  • television is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form.
  • images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two dimensions.
  • images are being provided in digital form for display in two dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”).
  • HD high definition
  • Conventional displays may use a variety of techniques to achieve three-dimensional (3D) image viewing functionality.
  • various types of glasses have been developed that may be worn by users to view three-dimensional images displayed by a conventional display.
  • glasses include glasses that utilize color filters or polarized filters.
  • the lenses of the glasses pass two-dimensional (2D) images of differing perspective to the user's left and right eyes.
  • the images are combined in the visual center of the brain of the user to be perceived as a three-dimensional image.
  • synchronized left eye, right eye liquid crystal display (LCD) shutter glasses may be used with conventional two-dimensional image displays to create a three-dimensional viewing illusion.
  • LCD display glasses are being used to display three-dimensional images to a user.
  • the lenses of the LCD display glasses include corresponding displays that provide images of differing perspective to the user's eyes, to be perceived by the user as three-dimensional.
  • a display device of this type may be switched to a three-dimensional mode for viewing of three-dimensional images, and may be switched to a two-dimensional mode for viewing of two-dimensional images (and/or to provide a respite from the viewing of three-dimensional images).
  • a parallax barrier is another example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions.
  • a parallax barrier includes a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that each of a user's eyes sees a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax.
  • a disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result.
  • Conventional three-dimensional displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
  • Some conventional devices are capable of receiving portions of 2D content from different sources to be presented on a single screen.
  • Other conventional devices are capable of receiving media guide text and program channels of media content wherein a remote control is used to produce guide text overlaying the media content on a single 2D screen.
  • a conventional browser may receive 2D graphic and textual content from many sources (e.g., different servers) and construct a single display within a single window.
  • Yet other conventional devices are capable of receiving full 3D2 content from a single source. For example, such full 3D2 content may be downloaded from a server or retrieved from a removable or fixed storage.
  • the single piece of 3D2 content can have a first portion that is destined for the left eye of a viewer and a second portion that is destined for the right eye of the viewer. These portions represent perspectives (a.k.a. camera views) of a common video event.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system in accordance with an embodiment that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an alternate embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment in which different orientations of transparent and opaque slits are used to simultaneously support different viewer orientations.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart of an alternate exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a portion of a pixel array to which image pixels have been mapped to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIG. 8 to support a first three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 to support a second three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier and a light generator to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that utilizes a controllable backlight array to provide regional luminosity control in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes a pixel array disposed between a light generator and an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel of a display system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens that may be used in a displays system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 shows a side view of the adaptable lenticular lens of FIG. 17 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an alternate embodiment.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 are block diagrams of exemplary systems that support presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIGS. 23-29 depict flowcharts of methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an exemplary practical implementation of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional display system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • references in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
  • the viewing content may include multiple portions that originate from respective sources and that are received via respective paths.
  • Each of the portions may include two-dimensional (2D) content or three-dimensional (3D) content.
  • Two-dimensional (2D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more two-dimensional images.
  • the two-dimensional content may represent a single perspective of a video event.
  • Three-dimensional (3D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more three-dimensional images.
  • the three-dimensional content may represent multiple perspectives of a video event.
  • the viewing content may be displayed to a user among any number (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.) of regions of a screen, such as a fixed 2D screen, a fixed 3D screen, or an adaptable 3D screen.
  • the viewing content may be displayed among the regions by driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion.
  • the adaptable light manipulator may comprise, for example, an adaptable lenticular lens such as that described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, or an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the adaptable light manipulator can be dynamically modified in order to accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot or switching between two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images.
  • the manner in which images are rendered to pixels of a pixel array used in conjunction with such an adaptable light manipulator may be coordinated with the state of the adaptable light manipulator to support a variety of viewing configurations.
  • an adaptable light manipulator, a pixel array and a non-uniform light generator may be driven in a coordinated fashion.
  • the adaptable light manipulator is an adaptable parallax barrier
  • simultaneous presentation of two-dimensional and three-dimensional content (and/or various instances of three-dimensional content representing differing numbers of perspectives) via different regions of the same display is also enabled.
  • This feature may be supported by a non-uniform light generator (such as a backlighting array) as described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system 140 that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • system 140 includes a media node 160 , external sources 194 A- 194 N, and external device(s) 196 .
  • Each of the external device(s) 196 includes a fixed 2D screen 167 , a fixed 3D screen 169 , or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 .
  • Each fixed 2D screen 167 has a fixed two-dimensional configuration. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content.
  • Each fixed 3D screen 169 has a fixed three-dimensional configuration.
  • a three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content.
  • a three-dimensional configuration may support presentation of any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience.
  • viewpoints a.k.a. perspectives
  • a three-dimensional configuration that includes x viewpoints is said to be a 3Dx configuration, where x is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
  • Each fixed 2D screen 167 , fixed 3D screen 169 , and adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 is capable of supporting presentation of 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of 3D content in respective regions of a screen surface. Regions of each screen 167 , 169 , and 171 are configured to support presentation of the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in the respective regions of the screen surface.
  • the configurations of the various regions of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 may be different or the same.
  • External sources 194 A- 194 N are configured to provide the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of the 3D content to media node 160 .
  • External sources 194 A- 194 N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 163 A- 163 N to media node 160 .
  • Each of the offer contents 163 A- 163 N includes an offer that relates to at least one 3D portion of the 3D content.
  • first external source 194 A may provide a first 3D portion 161 A to media node 160 .
  • First external source 194 A may also provide first offer content 163 A to media node 160 that relates to an Nth 3D portion 161 N.
  • Nth external source 194 N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161 N to media node 160 .
  • Nth external source 194 N may also provide Nth offer content 163 N to media node 160 that relates to another 3D portion that may be provided by another of the external sources 194 A- 194 N, and so on.
  • first external source 194 A may provide the first 3D portion 161 A to media node 160 .
  • Nth external source 194 N may provide Nth offer content 163 N to media node 160 that relates to the Nth 3D portion 161 N. If the offer from Nth external source 194 N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 194 N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161 N to media node 160 .
  • another of the external sources 194 A- 194 N may provide its offer content to media node 160 that relates to a respective 3D portion of the 3D content, and so on.
  • External sources 194 A- 194 N include circuitry 165 A- 165 N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • circuitry 165 A may indicate that the first 3D portion 161 A has been provided to media node 160 in an account of the user of media node 160 .
  • Circuitry 165 A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first 3D portion 161 A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first 3D portion, etc.
  • Media node 160 includes processing circuitry 162 , storage 176 , a screen assembly 178 , media source interface(s) circuitry 180 , and screen interface(s) circuitry 192 .
  • Media source interface(s) circuitry 180 receives the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of the 3D content from the respective external sources 194 A- 194 N for processing by processing circuitry 162 .
  • Storage 176 queues the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N as needed so that the portions 161 A- 161 N may be synchronized for presentation.
  • Storage 176 may include one or more internal sources that provide respective portions of the 3D content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N may be retrieved.
  • Screen assembly 178 is configured to present the 3D content (e.g., simultaneously present the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N) once the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N are synchronized.
  • Screen assembly 178 may be a fixed 2D screen assembly, a fixed 3D screen assembly, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly.
  • Processing circuitry 162 includes circuitry 164 , 166 , 168 , 170 , 172 , and 174 and 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 .
  • Circuitry 164 selects the first 3D portion 161 A of the 3D content from first external source 194 A.
  • Circuitry 166 interacts with a second source (e.g., second external source 194 B) to locate a second portion and offer based on the first 3D portion 161 A.
  • Circuitry 168 supports billing and account management regarding the various 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, circuitry 168 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 194 A- 194 N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • Circuitry 170 supports operations pertaining to acceptance or rejection of each offer that is received by media node 160 . For instance, circuitry 170 may inform external sources 194 A- 194 N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 172 initiates delivery of the second 3D portion from the second source in response to location of the second 3D portion by circuitry 166 . Circuitry 174 manages delivery of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, circuitry 174 may communicate with circuitry 172 to authorize initiation of delivery of the second portion by circuitry 172 . Circuitry 174 also supports queuing of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • circuitry 174 may determine an amount of storage 176 to be allocated for queuing of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 174 may monitor an amount of storage 176 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 176 to be allocated.
  • 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 performs operations on the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N to facilitate presentation of the 3D content.
  • 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 includes circuitry 184 , 186 , 188 , and 190 .
  • Circuitry 184 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N that are received from respective external sources 194 A- 194 N, so that processing may be performed on the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 186 , 188 , and/or 190 , which are described below.
  • Circuitry 184 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, before the 3D content is delivered to external device(s) 196 .
  • Circuitry 186 synchronizes frames of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • circuitry 186 may apply time offsets to one or more of the portions 161 A- 161 N and/or adjust the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in order to facilitate synchronization of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • circuitry 186 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the frame rates of some of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, etc.
  • Circuitry 188 is configured to integrate the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N into a single stream or file.
  • Circuitry 190 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc.
  • Circuitry 190 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
  • Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, crop one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N (e.g., to fit a screen characteristic such as 3:4, 9:16, or windowing), etc. For instance, circuitry 190 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 provides the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, to external device(s) 196 for presentation.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 196 .
  • a first portion comprising a desired video presentation is selected from an internal or external “first” source.
  • This first portion may yield the presentation in 2D, for example, or 3D2.
  • processing circuitry 160 assists or carries out location of a second portion of content related to the first portion.
  • the internal or external location of the second portion is at a different source than that of the first portion.
  • An automatically identified second portion could be (but doesn't have to be) offered for possible rejection by the viewer. If accepted or if settings do not require the viewer's confirmation, processing work may be performed.
  • the second source portion may or may not have many differing characteristics from that of the first portion.
  • Processing circuitry 160 may need to operate on at least one if not both of the portions to eliminate the differences.
  • Processing circuitry 160 may synchronize, as well.
  • the first portion may be one-third of the way into the presentation, and the second portion may need an offset and synchronization.
  • the output of processing circuitry 160 may be two independent files or streams or one combined stream. Such output may need to feed one or more fixed 2D, fixed 3D, and adaptive light manipulating internal or external screen assemblies. Processing circuitry 160 needs to make all of these things happen when needed, or provide support therefor. Other functionality of processing circuitry 160 can be appreciated with reference to the labels in the FIG. 1A , including payment processing, licensing, etc.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system 150 that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • system 150 includes a media node 101 , external sources 131 A- 131 N, and external device(s) 133 .
  • Each of the external device(s) 133 includes at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly.
  • Each of the adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies is configured to receive media streams/files outputs with integrated or separate screen configuration commands (a.k.a. control signals).
  • the screen commands specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content.
  • External sources 131 A- 131 N are configured to provide respective contents 135 A- 135 N to media node 101 .
  • the contents 135 A- 135 N may be fully independent and unrelated, or fully or partially related.
  • External sources 131 A- 131 N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 137 A- 137 N to media node 101 .
  • Each of the offer contents 137 A- 137 N includes an offer that relates to at least one of the contents 135 A- 135 N.
  • first external source 131 A may provide first content 135 A to media node 101 .
  • First external source 131 A may also provide first offer content 137 A to media node 101 that relates to Nth content 135 N.
  • Nth external source 131 N may provide the Nth content 135 N to media node 101 .
  • Nth external source 131 N may also provide Nth offer content 137 N to media node 101 that relates to other content that may be provided by another of the external sources 131 A- 131 N, and so on.
  • first external source 131 A may provide the first content 135 A to media node 101 .
  • Nth external source 131 N may provide Nth offer content 137 N to media node 101 that relates to the Nth content 135 N. If the offer from Nth external source 131 N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 131 N may provide the Nth content 135 N to media node 101 .
  • another of the external sources 131 A- 131 N may provide its offer content to media node 101 that relates to other content, and so on.
  • External sources 131 A- 131 N include circuitry 139 A- 139 N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the contents 135 A- 135 N.
  • circuitry 139 A may indicate that the first content 135 A has been provided to media node 101 in an account of the user of media node 101 .
  • Circuitry 139 A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first content 135 A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first content, etc.
  • Media node 101 includes processing circuitry 103 , storage 115 , at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly 117 , media source interface(s) circuitry 119 , and screen interface(s) circuitry 129 .
  • Media source interface(s) circuitry 119 receives the contents 135 A- 135 N from the respective external sources 131 A- 131 N for processing by processing circuitry 103 .
  • Storage 115 queues the contents 135 A- 135 N as needed so that the contents 135 A- 135 N may be synchronized for presentation.
  • Storage 115 may include one or more internal sources, each of which is capable of providing respective content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N may be retrieved.
  • the at least one screen assembly 117 is configured to simultaneously present the contents 135 A- 135 N once the contents 135 A- 135 N are synchronized.
  • Processing circuitry 103 includes circuitry 105 , 107 , 109 , 111 , and 113 and content adjustments circuitry 121 .
  • Circuitry 105 provides software application (e.g., browser) based support for selection of the various contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 105 may generate a graphical interface for enabling the viewer to select one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N for presentation.
  • Circuitry 107 supports billing and account management regarding the various contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 107 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 131 A- 131 N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective contents 135 A- 135 N.
  • Circuitry 109 provides viewer interface support for enabling the viewer to accept or reject each offer that is received by media node 101 . For instance, circuitry 109 may inform external sources 131 A- 131 N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 111 manages delivery of the contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 111 may delay delivery of the various contents 135 A- 135 N until the contents 135 A- 135 N are synchronized. Circuitry 111 also supports queuing of the contents 135 A- 135 N. For example, circuitry 111 may determine an amount of storage 115 to be allocated for queuing of the contents 135 A- 135 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 111 may monitor an amount of storage 115 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 115 to be allocated.
  • Circuitry 113 supports full and regional (re)configuration of adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assemblies. For instance, circuitry 113 may provide screen (re)configuration commands for configuring an entire adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly or one or more regions thereof based on any of a factors, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. In one example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be integrated into the one or more streams/files that are delivered toward the screen assembly. In another example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be sent externally from the aforementioned one or more streams/files via separate command signaling using the same communication pathway or a separate pathway that is independent from the pathway that is used for delivering the one or more streams/files.
  • Content adjustments circuitry 121 performs operations on the contents 135 A- 135 N to facilitate presentation thereof.
  • Content adjustments circuitry 121 includes circuitry 123 , 125 , and 127 .
  • Circuitry 123 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the contents 135 A- 135 N that are received from respective external sources 131 A- 131 N, so that processing may be performed on the contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 125 and/or 127 , which are described below.
  • Circuitry 123 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the contents 135 A- 135 N before delivery thereof to external device(s) 196 .
  • Circuitry 125 supports outputting multiple streams or files or an integrated stream or file. For example, circuitry 125 may synchronize frames of the contents 135 A- 135 N by applying time offsets to one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N and/or by adjusting the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 125 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the frame rates of some of the contents 135 A- 135 N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the contents 135 A- 135 N, etc.
  • Circuitry 127 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the contents 135 A- 135 N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. Circuitry 127 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the contents 135 A- 135 N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the contents 135 A- 135 N.
  • Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the resolution of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, change (e.g., increase or decrease) a frame rate that is associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, crop one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, etc.
  • circuitry 127 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the various contents 135 A- 135 N to external device(s) 133 for presentation.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135 A- 135 N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135 A- 135 N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 133 .
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the screen configuration commands that specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly of the external device(s) 133 is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. The screen configuration commands may be integrated among the contents 135 A- 135 N or separate from the contents 135 A- 135 N.
  • a media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc.
  • a media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc.
  • a removable media e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray
  • a two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content.
  • a three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content.
  • a three-dimensional configuration may include any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes n viewpoints is said to be a 3Dn configuration, where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
  • first content may be at least partially related to second content if the second content is 2D or 3D content and the first content includes movie text (e.g., closed caption text) that relates to the 2D or 3D content.
  • movie text e.g., closed caption text
  • FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 100 that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment.
  • display system 100 includes driver circuitry 102 and a screen 104 , wherein screen 104 include a pixel array 122 and an adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
  • driver circuitry 104 includes pixel array driver circuitry 112 and adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 .
  • Pixel array 122 comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged as a grid or other distribution). Pixel array 122 is a self-illuminating or light-generating pixel array such that the pixels of pixel array 122 each emit light included in light 132 . Each pixel may be a separately addressable light source (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display such as an OLED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel of pixel array 122 may be individually controllable to vary color and intensity. In an embodiment, each pixel of pixel array 122 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 124 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 122 .
  • Barrier element array 142 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. Combinations of barrier elements may be configured to be selectively opaque or transparent to enable various effects.
  • the states of the barrier elements of barrier element array 142 may be configured such that light 132 emanating from pixel array 122 is filtered to produce filtered light 134 , wherein filtered light 134 includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 136 in a viewing space 106 .
  • each barrier element may have a round, square, or rectangular shape, and barrier element array 142 may have any number of rows of barrier elements that extend a vertical length of barrier element array 142 .
  • each barrier element may have a “band” shape that extends a vertical length of barrier element array 142 , such that barrier element array 142 includes a single horizontal row of barrier elements.
  • Each barrier element may include one or more of such bands, and different regions of barrier element array 142 may include barrier elements that include different numbers of such bands.
  • barrier elements may be capable of being completely transparent or opaque, and in other embodiments, barrier elements may not be capable of being fully transparent or opaque.
  • barrier elements may be capable of being 95% transparent when considered to be “transparent” and may be capable of being 5% transparent when considered to be “opaque.”
  • Transparent and opaque as used herein are intended to encompass barrier elements being substantially transparent (e.g., greater than 75% transparent, including completely transparent) and substantially opaque (e.g., less than 25% transparent, including completely opaque), respectively.
  • Driver circuitry 102 receives control signals 108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 1C ).
  • control signals 108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
  • the control signals 108 cause driver circuitry 102 to place screen 104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations.
  • adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 transmits drive signals 154 that cause barrier element array 142 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration.
  • the selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in corresponding display regions.
  • FIG. 2 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 200 that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 200 is an example of adaptable parallax barrier 124 of FIG. 1C .
  • adaptable parallax barrier 200 includes a barrier element array 202 , which includes a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
  • barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips (or “slits”) 206 a - 206 g .
  • slits or “slitslitslits”
  • non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g are alternated with parallel blocking strips 208 a - 208 g of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be blocking.
  • non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g and blocking strips 208 a - 208 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 204 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty barrier elements 204 ) of barrier element array 202 , although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions.
  • Non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g and blocking strips 208 a - 208 g form a parallax barrier configuration for adaptable parallax barrier 200 .
  • the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of barrier elements 204 in barrier element array 202 to be non-blocking, to be alternated with blocking strips 208 , as desired.
  • the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selected based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B . It will be recognized that hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of non-blocking strips 206 and blocking strips 208 may be present in adaptable parallax barrier 200 .
  • FIG. 3 shows an alternative example of an adaptable parallax barrier 300 that has also been configured to support a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • adaptable parallax barrier 300 includes a barrier element array 302 , which includes a plurality of barrier elements 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 ⁇ 1 array).
  • Barrier elements 304 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of barrier elements 204 in FIG. 2 , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of barrier element array 302 . As shown in FIG.
  • barrier element array 302 includes parallel non-blocking strips 306 a - 306 g alternated with parallel blocking strips 308 a - 308 g .
  • parallel non-blocking strips 306 a - 306 g and parallel blocking strips 308 a - 308 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 304 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one barrier element 304 ) of barrier element array 302 .
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 300 may be configured in accordance with control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • Each of adaptable parallax barriers 200 and 300 configured in the manner shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 respectively, filter light produced by a pixel array to form one or more three-dimensional views in a viewing space, thus supporting a three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • all of the barrier elements of either adaptable parallax barrier 200 or 300 can simply be placed in a non-blocking state. Additional details concerning how the adaptable parallax barriers operate to support such three-dimensional viewing may be found, for example, in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.”
  • the entirety of the barrier element array is filled with parallel non-blocking strips to support three-dimensional viewing.
  • one or more regions of an adaptable parallax barrier may be filled with parallel non-blocking strips to deliver three-dimensional images, and one or more other regions of the adaptable parallax barrier may be rendered transparent to deliver two-dimensional images.
  • a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions may be supported.
  • FIG. 4 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments.
  • the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 400 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2 , having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
  • FIG. 1 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments.
  • the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B
  • a first region 402 of barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips that together fill first region 402 .
  • a second region 404 of barrier element array 202 is surrounded by first region 402 .
  • Second region 404 is a rectangular shaped region of barrier element array 202 that includes a two-dimensional array of barrier elements 204 that are non-blocking.
  • barrier element array 202 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements of first region 402 , and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements inside of second region 404 .
  • first region 402 may include all non-blocking barrier elements 202 to pass a two-dimensional image
  • second region 404 may include parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips to pass a three-dimensional image.
  • adaptable parallax barrier 400 may have additional numbers, sizes, and arrangements of regions configured to pass different combinations of two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images.
  • different regions of an adaptable parallax barrier that have parallel non-blocking strips may have the parallel non-blocking strips oriented at different angles to deliver three-dimensional images to viewers that are oriented differently.
  • a viewing configuration that mixes three-dimensional viewing regions having different viewing orientations may be supported.
  • FIG. 5 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 500 in which transparent slits have different orientations, according to an example embodiment.
  • the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 500 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 500 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2 , having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
  • a first region 510 (e.g., a bottom half) of barrier element array 202 includes a first plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e (each having a width of two barrier elements 204 ). As shown in FIG. 5 , parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e are alternated with parallel blocking strips 504 a - 504 f of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of three barrier elements 204 ). Parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e are oriented in a first direction (e.g., along a vertical axis).
  • a second region 512 (e.g., a top half) of barrier element array 202 includes a second plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d (each having a width of one barrier element 204 ).
  • parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d are alternated with parallel blocking strips 508 a - 508 c of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of two barrier elements 204 ).
  • Parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d are oriented in a second direction (e.g., along a horizontal axis).
  • first and second pluralities of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e and 506 a - 506 d are present in barrier element array 202 that are oriented perpendicularly to each other.
  • the region of barrier element array 202 that includes first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented vertically (e.g., sitting upright or standing up).
  • the region of barrier element array 202 that includes second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented horizontally (e.g., laying down). In this manner, users who are oriented differently relative to each other can still each be provided with a corresponding three-dimensional image that accommodates their position.
  • pixel array 122 since a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 can be dynamically modified to support a particular viewing configuration, pixel array 122 must also be controlled to support the same viewing configuration. In particular, the rendering of pixels of an image (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) among the pixels of pixel array 122 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) must be handled in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
  • This may entail, for example, changing a number of display pixels that represents each image pixel (i.e., changing the resolution of a displayed image) and/or changing which display pixels or groups thereof correspond to the respective image pixels (i.e., changing the locations at which the image pixels are displayed), in response to modification of a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
  • Such changes may be implemented by a controller (not shown in FIG. 1C ) via delivery of appropriate control signals 108 to pixel array driver circuitry 112 .
  • pixel array driver circuitry 204 when a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 supports a first viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108 , pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the first viewing configuration. Furthermore, when the configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 is modified to support a second viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108 , pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with the control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the second viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124 ) in accordance with an embodiment.
  • the method of flowchart 600 begins at step 602 .
  • a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator such as adaptable parallax barrier 124
  • a number of display pixels in a pixel array such as pixel array 122 , that represents each image pixel of a plurality of image pixels is changed in response to modifying the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
  • FIGS. 8 and 9 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 600 .
  • a portion of a pixel array 800 includes a 16 ⁇ 16 array of display pixels.
  • An example display pixel is shown as display pixel 802 .
  • each display pixel comprises a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels as discussed above.
  • a first image comprising a 4 ⁇ 4 array of image pixels (each shown depicting the letter “A” to indicate that each is included in the same image) is mapped to the display pixels such that 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel.
  • An example of an image pixel is shown as image pixel 804 .
  • the first image is intended to represent an image that is viewed when an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array is configured to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 9 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • the three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the combined display of a first image and a second image across the same portion of pixel array 800 .
  • the pixel array is controlled such that 2 rather than 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel of the first image (each still shown depicting the letter “A”). This corresponds to a decreased viewing resolution of the first image.
  • the other half of the display pixels are now used to present each image pixel of a second image (each shown depicting the letter “B”).
  • the image pixels associated with the different images are aligned with the adaptable light manipulator to achieve a desired three-dimensional viewing effect.
  • FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart 700 of another exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124 ) in accordance with an embodiment.
  • the method of flowchart 700 begins at step 702 .
  • a plurality of image pixels is mapped to a plurality of respective first subsets of display pixels in a pixel array, such as pixel array 122 .
  • a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator that is positioned proximate to the pixel array is changed.
  • a slit pattern, orientation, or the like, of adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be changed.
  • a mapping of the plurality of image pixels is changed from the plurality of respective first subsets of the display pixels to a plurality of respective second subsets of the display pixels in the pixel array to compensate for changing the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
  • FIGS. 9 and 10 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 700 .
  • a portion of a pixel array 800 is used to simultaneously display a first image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “A” and a second image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “B.”
  • this display format is utilized to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration corresponding to a particular arrangement of an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array.
  • FIG. 10 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a modified three-dimensional viewing configuration (e.g., in response to a changed location of a viewer or some other factor).
  • the modified three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the display location of the first image and the second image to be shifted, as shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the same image pixel 904 is now rendered to the bottom-most two display pixels in the second column from the left of array portion 800 .
  • FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1100 , which is another example of a display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations.
  • display system 1100 includes driver circuitry 1102 and a screen 1104 , wherein screen 1104 include a light generator 1122 , an adaptable parallax barrier 1124 and a pixel array 1126 .
  • driver circuitry 1102 includes light generator driver circuitry 1112 , adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 and pixel array driver circuitry 1116 .
  • Light generator 1122 emits light 1132 .
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 1124 is positioned proximate to light generator 1122 .
  • Barrier element array 1144 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 1124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Barrier element array 1144 filters light 1132 received from light generator 1122 to generate filtered light 1134 .
  • Filtered light 1134 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image (e.g., formed by a pair of two-dimensional images in filtered light 1134 ) to be formed based on images subsequently imposed on filtered light 1134 by pixel array 1126 .
  • Pixel array 1126 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged in a grid or other distribution) like pixel array 122 of FIG. 1C .
  • pixel array 1126 is not self-illuminating, and instead is a light filter that imposes images (e.g., in the form of color, grayscale, etc.) on filtered light 1134 from adaptable parallax barrier 1124 to generate filtered light 1136 to include one or more images.
  • Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be a separately addressable filter (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display, or of other type of display).
  • Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be individually controllable to vary the color imposed on the corresponding light passing through, and/or to vary the intensity of the passed light in filtered light 1136 .
  • each pixel of pixel array 1126 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • Driver circuitry 1102 receives control signals 1108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 11 ).
  • control signals 1108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
  • the control signals 1108 cause driver circuitry 1102 to place screen 1104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations.
  • adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 transmits drive signals 1154 that cause barrier element array 1144 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration.
  • pixel array driver circuitry 1116 transmits drive signals 1156 to cause pixels of one or more images (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) to be rendered among the pixels of pixel array 1126 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 1124 .
  • the selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in different display regions.
  • conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels.
  • the backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels.
  • light generator 1122 includes a backlight array 1142 which is a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 1142 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby.
  • a single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation.
  • each light source in backlight array 1142 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.
  • the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 1142 can selectively controlled by drive signals 1152 generated by light generator driver circuitry 1112 so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of screen 1104 can also be controlled.
  • This enables display system 1100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
  • backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
  • backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1200 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.
  • Display system 1200 comprises one implementation of display system 1100 .
  • display system 1200 includes a light generator 1202 that includes a backlight array 1212 , an adaptable parallax barrier 1204 that includes a barrier element array 1222 and a display panel 1206 that includes a pixel array 1232 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
  • a first portion 1234 of pixel array 1232 and a first portion 1224 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content
  • a second portion 1236 of pixel array 1232 and a second portion 1226 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image
  • a third portion of 1238 of pixel array 1232 and a third portion 1228 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image.
  • the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1214 , a second portion 1216 and a third portion 1218 of backlight array 1212 can respectively be controlled.
  • the light sources within first portion 1214 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1216 and third portion 1218 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1214 is aligned.
  • the light sources within second portion 1216 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1218 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1218 is aligned.
  • the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1218 is aligned.
  • other control schemes may be used.
  • a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • backlight array 1212 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • each light source in backlight array 1212 there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1212 and every display pixel in pixel array 1232 .
  • the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232 .
  • a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1212 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1232 , wherein N is an integer greater than 1.
  • each light source in backlight array 1212 may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1232 , although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232 .
  • light sources in backlight array 1212 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 1212 . In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may be controllable both individually and in groups. It will be recognized that light generator 1202 , adaptable parallax barrier 1204 , and display panel 1206 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
  • FIGS. 11 and 12 show display system configurations in which a barrier element array of an adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a pixel array
  • the pixel array may be disposed between the backlight array and the barrier element array.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1300 that includes a pixel array 1324 disposed between a light generator 1322 that includes a backlight array 1342 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1326 that includes a barrier element array 1344 to support the generation of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images perceivable in a viewing space 1306 .
  • selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in backlight array 1342 may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of backlight array 1342 , pixel array 1324 and barrier element array 1344 .
  • light generator 1322 . pixel array 1324 , and/or adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
  • FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1400 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above.
  • the regional brightness control scheme may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example. As shown in FIG.
  • display system 1400 includes a display panel 1402 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1404 .
  • Display system 1400 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 14 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
  • display panel 1402 includes a pixel array 1412 .
  • Each of the pixels in a first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 14 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
  • Each of the pixels in a second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by the pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1400 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 1404 includes barrier element array 1422 that includes a first portion 1424 and a second portion 1426 .
  • Barrier element array 1422 is aligned with pixel array 1414 such that first portion 1424 of blocking region array 1422 overlays first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 overlays second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 .
  • Adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry causes all the barrier elements within first portion 1424 of barrier element array 1422 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 1400 .
  • the adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry manipulates the barrier elements within second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1400 .
  • the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image.
  • the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behind pixel array 1412 .
  • drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 .
  • drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 .
  • the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 , independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
  • a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1412 and blocking element array 1422 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 1412 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel 1500 .
  • Display panel 1500 includes a pixel array 1502 that includes a first portion 1504 and a second portion 1506 , wherein each of first portion 1504 and second portion 1506 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1502 . It is to be assumed that first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion of a backlight array (not shown in FIG.
  • Second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion of the backlight array.
  • the amount of light emitted by each light source in the second portion of the backlight array to illuminate second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first portion of the backlight array to illuminate first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
  • This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause a three-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 and an adaptable parallax barrier to appear to have a uniform brightness level with respect to a two-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1504 and the adaptable parallax barrier.
  • the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first and second portions of the backlight array to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1504 and 1506 of pixel array 1502 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts.
  • the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
  • the pixels in boundary area 1512 immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
  • the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 .
  • the pixels in boundary area 1514 immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 .
  • the reduced luminosity of the light sources in the first portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 1514 , causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
  • an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 1512 or boundary region 1514 to compensate for the undesired visual effects.
  • driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1512 of pixel array 1502 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1512 , thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the second portion of the backlight array.
  • driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1514 of pixel array 1502 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1514 , thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the first portion of the backlight array.
  • the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 1512 and 1514 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
  • FIG. 15 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control.
  • Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
  • a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination.
  • Display system 100 described above in reference to FIG. 1C may be representative of such a system, provided that pixel array 122 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs.
  • the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up the OLED/PLED pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 100 can also be controlled.
  • the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
  • the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect.
  • a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content.
  • light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach.
  • an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach.
  • Such an approach involves the use of a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier.
  • the brightness regulation overlay is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion.
  • the brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels.
  • an adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used.
  • the combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself.
  • Control over the individual barrier elements of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay may be provided by using coordinated driver circuitry signaling.
  • coordinate signaling may cause the pixels of the adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays.
  • the regional brightness control scheme described above with reference to FIG. 15 which may include such coordinated signaling, may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator 1600 that includes an adaptable parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels.
  • the exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 1600 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
  • a first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 1602 .
  • a three-dimensional region 1604 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a two-dimensional region 1606 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels.
  • the medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of two-dimensional region 1606 to better match that of three-dimensional region 1604 .
  • two-dimensional region 1606 could instead comprise a three-dimensional region having a number of views that is different than three-dimensional region 1604 , thus also requiring brightness regulation.
  • a boundary region 1610 within two-dimensional region 1606 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with three-dimensional region 1604 .
  • the grayscale level of an inner portion 1608 of two-dimensional region 1606 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of two-dimensional region 1606 above section line 1602 .
  • a first boundary region 1612 and a second boundary region 1614 within three-dimensional region 1604 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from two-dimensional region 1606 .
  • an inner portion 1616 of three-dimensional region 1604 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
  • the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black.
  • this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
  • adaptable light manipulator 1600 comprises the only component used in a display system for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation.
  • the display system further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
  • a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
  • adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented as an integrated adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay.
  • adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented using an adaptable parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel.
  • an adaptable lenticular lens may be used.
  • adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens.
  • adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens.
  • the configuration of such an adaptable lenticular lens may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • adaptable lenticular lens 1700 includes a sub-lens array 1702 .
  • Sub-lens array 1702 includes a plurality of sub-lenses 1704 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged side-by-side in a row).
  • Each sub-lens 1704 is shown in FIG. 17 as generally cylindrical in shape and having a substantially semi-circular cross-section, but in other embodiments may have other shapes.
  • sub-lens array 1702 is shown to include eight sub-lenses for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting.
  • sub-lens array 1702 may include any number (e.g., hundreds, thousands, etc.) of sub-lenses 1704 .
  • FIG. 18 shows a side view of adaptable lenticular lens 1700 .
  • light may be passed through adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in the direction of dotted arrow 1802 to be diverted.
  • Adaptable lenticular lens 1700 is adaptable in that it can be modified to manipulate light in different ways in order to accommodate different viewing configurations.
  • adaptable lenticular lens is made from an elastic material and can be stretched or shrunk in one or more directions in response to generated drive signals.
  • Display systems in accordance with further embodiments may include multiple layers of light manipulators. Such display systems may enable multiple three-dimensional images to be displayed in a viewing space.
  • the multiple light manipulating layers may enable spatial separation of the images.
  • a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display a first three-dimensional image in a first region of a viewing space (e.g., a left-side area), a second three-dimensional image in a second region of the viewing space (e.g., a central area), a third three-dimensional image in a third region of the viewing space (e.g., a right-side area), etc.
  • a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display any number of spatially separated three-dimensional images as desired for a particular application (e.g., according to a number and spacing of viewers in the viewing space, etc.).
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1900 that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment.
  • display system 1900 includes driver circuitry 1902 and a screen 1904 , wherein screen 1904 includes a pixel array 1922 , a first light manipulator 1924 and a second light manipulator 1926 .
  • first light manipulator 1924 includes first light manipulator elements 1942 and second light manipulator 1926 includes second light manipulator elements 1944 .
  • driver circuitry 1902 includes pixel array driver circuitry 1912 and light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 .
  • Pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 based on a control signal 1908 received from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 19 ) and drive signals 1952 may be received by pixel array 1922 to generate light 1932 .
  • control signal 1908 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
  • Each pixel of pixel array 1922 may generate light that is received at first light manipulator 1924 .
  • pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 to cause pixel array 1922 to emit light 1932 containing a plurality of images corresponding to the sets of pixels.
  • First light manipulator 1924 may be configured to manipulate light 1932 received from pixel array 1922 .
  • first light manipulator 1924 includes light manipulator elements 1942 configured to perform manipulating (e.g., filtering, diverting, etc.) of light 1932 to generate manipulated light 1934 .
  • Light manipulator elements 1942 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by first light manipulator 1924 .
  • First light manipulator 1924 may perform filtering in a similar manner as an adaptable parallax barrier described above or in other manner.
  • first light manipulator 1924 may include a lenticular lens that diverts light 1932 to perform light manipulating, generating manipulated light 1934 .
  • light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1954 based on control signal 1908 received by driver circuitry 1902 to cause light manipulator elements 1942 to manipulate light 1932 as desired.
  • Manipulated light 1934 is received by second light manipulator 1926 to generate manipulated light 1936 that includes a plurality of three-dimensional images 1962 A- 1962 N formed in a viewing space 1906 . It will be recognized that manipulated light 1936 may include any number N of three-dimensional images. As shown in FIG. 19 , second light manipulator 1926 includes light manipulator elements 1944 configured to perform manipulating of manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 . Light manipulator elements 1944 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by second light manipulator 1926 . In an embodiment, light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1956 based on control signal 1908 to cause light manipulator elements 1944 to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 including three-dimensional images 1962 A- 1962 N as desired. In embodiments, second light manipulator 1926 may include an adaptable parallax barrier or lenticular lens configured to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 .
  • screen 1904 of display system 1900 supports multiple viewers with media content in the form of three-dimensional images or views.
  • Screen 1904 may provide a first three-dimensional view based on first three-dimensional media content to a first viewer, a second three-dimensional view based on second three-dimensional media content to a second viewer, and optionally further three-dimensional views based on further three-dimensional media content to further viewers.
  • First and second light manipulators 1924 and 1926 each cause three-dimensional media content to be presented to a corresponding viewer via a corresponding area of screen 1904 , with each viewer being enabled to view corresponding media content without viewing media content directed to other viewers.
  • the areas of screen 1904 that provide the various three-dimensional views of media content overlap each other at least in part. In the embodiment of FIG.
  • the areas may be the same area. As such, multiple three-dimensional views that are each viewable by a corresponding viewer may be delivered by a single screen.
  • Embodiments of display system 1900 may also be configured to generate two-dimensional views, as well as any combination of one or more two-dimensional views simultaneously with one or more three-dimensional views.
  • FIG. 20 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 2000 , which is a further example of a display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers. Like display system 1900 of FIG. 19 , display system 2000 is configured to display multiple three-dimensional images 2062 A- 2062 N in a viewing space 2006 in a spatially separated manner. As shown in FIG. 20 , display system 2000 includes driver circuitry 2002 and a screen 2004 , wherein screen 2004 includes a light generator 2022 , a first light manipulator 2024 , a second light manipulator 2026 and a pixel array 2028 . As shown in FIG.
  • light generator 2022 optionally includes a backlight array 2042
  • first light manipulator 2024 includes first light manipulator elements 2044
  • second light manipulator 2026 includes second light manipulator elements 2046 .
  • driver circuitry 2002 receives control signals 2008 and includes light generator driver circuitry 2012 , light manipulator driver circuitry 2014 , and pixel array driver circuitry 2016 .
  • Control signals 2008 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
  • Light generator driver circuitry 2012 , light manipulator driver circuitry 2014 , and pixel array driver circuitry 2016 may generate drive signals to perform their respective functions based on control signals 2008 .
  • first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026 are positioned between light generator 2022 and pixel array 2028 .
  • pixel array 2028 may instead be located between first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026 .
  • FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • system 2100 includes a first source 2102 A, a second source 2102 B, a media circuitry 2104 , and a screen 2106 .
  • First source 2102 A provides first a view portion 2122 A of three-dimensional (3D) viewing content 2134 via a first pathway 2120 A.
  • First view portion 2122 A represents a first subset of perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
  • Second source 2102 B provides a second view portion 2122 B of the 3D viewing content 2134 via a second pathway 2120 B.
  • the second view portion 2122 B represents a second subset of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
  • Each of the first and second subsets may include any suitable number (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
  • a number of the perspective views that are included in the first subset and a number of the perspective views that are included in the second subset may be the same or different.
  • second source 2102 B provides a difference file in lieu of the second view portion 2122 B.
  • the difference file defines a difference between the first view portion 2122 A and the second view portion 2122 B.
  • Each of first and second sources 2102 A and 2102 B may be a remote source or a local source.
  • a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server.
  • a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
  • Each of the first and second pathways 2120 A and 2120 B may include one or more local device pathways, point-to-point links, and/or pathways in a hybrid fiber coaxial (HFC) network, a wide-area network (e.g., the Internet), a local area network (LAN), another type of network, or a combination thereof.
  • HFC hybrid fiber coaxial
  • a wide-area network e.g., the Internet
  • LAN local area network
  • Each of the first and second pathways 2120 A and 2120 B may support wired, wireless, or both transmission media, including satellite, terrestrial (e.g., fiber optic, copper, twisted pair, coaxial, or the like), radio, microwave, free-space optics, and/or any other form or method of transmission.
  • Media circuitry 2104 is configured to process the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B to support presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 .
  • Media circuitry 2104 includes first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 .
  • First circuitry 2112 receives the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B. For example, if the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B are encoded, first circuitry 2112 may decode the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B for further processing by second circuitry 2114 .
  • first circuitry 2112 may decode the first view portion 2122 A and the difference file in accordance with one or more techniques described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D and Multi-View 3D Content,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Second circuitry 2114 generates drive signal(s) 2124 based on the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B.
  • the drive signal(s) 2124 are intended to control screen 2106 to support a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content 2134 .
  • second circuitry 2114 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112 , 1116 , 1912 , or 2016 ) for controlling a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028 ) in screen 2106 .
  • second circuitry 2114 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114 , or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014 ) for controlling one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026 ) in screen 2106 .
  • second circuitry 2114 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012 ) for controlling a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022 ) in screen 2106 .
  • Second circuitry 2114 may synchronize the first view portion 2122 A and the second view portion 2122 B. Second circuitry may buffer the first view portion 2122 A and/or the second view portion 2122 B to perform the synchronization. Such buffering may enable second circuitry 2114 to shift the first view portion 2122 A and/or the second view portion 2122 B with respect to time to align frames that are included in the second view portion 2122 B with corresponding frames that are included in the first view portion 2122 A, or vice versa. In accordance with this example, second circuitry 2114 generates the drive signal(s) in response to synchronizing the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B.
  • Third circuitry 2116 responds to offers that are provided by offer system 2108 .
  • Third circuitry 2116 receives the offers via first circuitry 2112 .
  • first circuitry 2112 receives an offer 2126 that relates to second view portion 2122 B from offer system 2108 .
  • First circuitry 2112 forwards the offer 2126 to third circuitry 2116 .
  • third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on one or more predetermined criteria. Such criteria may require, for example, that a cost that is specified by the offer 2126 be less than a cost threshold, that the offer 2126 specify one or more perspective views represented by the second view portion 2122 B that are included among one or more designated perspective views, etc.
  • third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on input from a viewer. In accordance with this example, third circuitry 2116 may send a request regarding the offer 2126 to the viewer and determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on the viewer's response to the request.
  • Third circuitry 2116 is shown in FIG. 21 to provide an acceptance 2128 of the offer 2126 to offer system 2108 for purposes of illustration. Provision of the acceptance 2128 by third circuitry 2116 may trigger any of a variety of events.
  • second source 2102 B may provide the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128 .
  • offer system 2108 may provide an enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 that enables media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122 B in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128 .
  • the enabling signal 2132 may include information, such as a passcode or a decryption key, that first circuitry 2112 may use to obtain access to the second view portion 2122 B.
  • third circuitry 2116 may trigger a billing event regarding the second view portion 2122 B based at least in part on provision of the acceptance 2128 .
  • the billing event may involve billing the viewer a cost that is specified in the offer 2126 .
  • second source 2102 B may provide the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 regardless whether the offer 2126 and the acceptance 2128 are present.
  • first circuitry 2112 may be capable of accessing the second view portion 2122 B regardless whether first circuitry 2112 receives the enabling signal 2132 .
  • Fourth circuitry 2108 determines that the first view portion 2122 A is received by first circuitry 2112 . For instance, fourth circuitry 2108 may receive an indicator from first circuitry 2112 that indicates receipt of the first view portion 2122 A. Upon determining that the first view portion 2122 A is received, fourth circuitry 2108 delivers an indication 2130 relating to the first view portion 2122 A to offer system 2108 . The indication 2130 indicates that the first view portion 2122 A is received by media circuitry 2104 . In an embodiment, first circuitry 2112 receives the offer 2126 from offer system 2108 in response to fourth circuitry 2118 providing the indication 2130 to offer system 2108 .
  • Offer system 2108 provides the offer 2126 relating to the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 .
  • Offer system 2108 may receive the acceptance 2128 from third circuitry 2116 is response to providing the offer 2126 .
  • offer system 2108 upon receiving the acceptance 2128 , offers system 2108 provides then instruction 2134 to second source 2102 B.
  • the instruction 2134 instructs second source 2102 B to deliver the second view portion 2122 B to media circuitry 2104 . Accordingly, second source may not deliver the second view portion 2122 B to media circuitry 2104 until receipt of the instruction 2134 .
  • offer system 2108 upon receiving the acceptance 2128 , provides the enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 for enabling media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122 B.
  • the output of media circuitry 2104 comprises the drive signal(s) 2124 .
  • Screen 2106 presents the 3D viewing content 2134 in viewing space 2110 based on the drive signal(s) 2124 .
  • screen 2106 may include a pixel array, one or more light manipulators, and/or a light generator for supporting presentation of the 3D viewing content 2134 .
  • Screen 2106 may be any suitable type of screen, including but not limited to an LCD screen, a plasma screen, a light emitting device (LED) screen (e.g., an OLED (organic LED) screen), etc.
  • LED light emitting device
  • first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 are labeled as such, the functionality of first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • system 2100 may not include one or more of first source 2102 A, second source 2102 B, screen 2106 , offer system 2108 , first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and/or fourth circuitry 2118 .
  • system 2100 may include elements in addition to or in lieu of first source 2102 A, second source 2102 B, screen 2106 , offer system 2108 , first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and/or fourth circuitry 2118 .
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram of another exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • display system 2200 includes a first source 2202 A, a second source 2202 B, media circuitry 2204 , and a screen 2206 .
  • First and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B and screen 2206 operate in like manner to first and second sources 2102 A and 2102 B and screen 2106 , as described above with reference to FIG. 21 .
  • first and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B provide respective first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B via respective first and second pathways 2220 A and 2220 B to media circuitry 2104 .
  • Screen 2206 presents 3D viewing content 2234 in viewing space 2210 based on drive signal(s) 2224 that are received from media circuitry 2204 .
  • Media circuitry 2204 includes first circuitry 2212 , second circuitry 2214 , and third circuitry 2216 .
  • First and second circuitry 2212 and 2214 operate in like manner to first and second circuitry 2112 and 2114 , as described above with reference to FIG. 21 .
  • first circuitry 2212 receives the first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B from first and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B.
  • Second circuitry 2214 generates the drive signal(s) 2224 based on the first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B.
  • First circuitry 2212 is shown in FIG. 22 to receive a control signal 2236 , a search instruction 2238 , and an orientation indication 2240 for illustrative purposes. It will be recognized that first circuitry 2212 need not necessarily receive each of the control signal 2236 , the search instruction 2238 , and the orientation indication 2240 . For instance, first circuitry may receive any one or more of the control signal 2236 , the search instruction 2238 , and/or the orientation indication 2240 .
  • the control signal 2236 is generated in response to viewer input.
  • the control signal 2236 may specify one or more portions or perspective views that are identified by the viewer input.
  • First circuitry 2212 may receive the control signal 2236 from a user input interface that is accessible to the viewer.
  • the user input interface may be a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
  • third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222 B based on the control signal 2236 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may review available portions of content to identify the portion(s) that are specified by the control signal 2236 or that represent perspective views that are specified by the control signal 2236 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B in response to the second view portion 2222 B including the identified portion(s).
  • the search instruction 2238 is intended to initiate a search for portion(s) of content that may be combined with the first view portion 2222 A for presentation of the 3D viewing content 2234 .
  • the search instruction 2238 may be generated by a user input interface in response to viewer input, for example.
  • third circuitry 2216 initiates the search based on the search instruction 2238 .
  • first circuitry 2212 may receive the second view portion 2222 B in response to initiation of the search.
  • the orientation indication 2240 indicates an orientation of the viewer with respect to screen 2206 .
  • the orientation indication 2240 may be received from a device that is worn by the viewer, held by the viewer, sitting in the viewer's lap, in the viewer's pocket, sitting next the viewer, etc.
  • the orientation indication 2240 may be received in response to a distancing signal that is transmitted toward the viewer by third circuitry 2216 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may determine an orientation (e.g., location) of the viewer based on a difference between a time at which third circuitry 2216 transmits the distancing signal and a time at which third circuitry receives the orientation indication 2240 . For instance, a reflection of the distancing signal from the viewer may be received by third circuitry 2216 as the orientation indication 2240 .
  • third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222 B based on the orientation of the viewer, as indicated by the orientation indication 2240 . As shown in FIG. 22 , third circuitry 2216 provides a selection instruction 2242 to second source 2202 B. The selection instruction 2242 instructs second source 2202 B to provide the second view portion 2222 B to media circuitry 2204 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B based on the second view portion 2222 B representing perspective views that facilitate a left-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 1 , 2 , and 4 of 3D8 viewing content.
  • the first view portion 2222 A represents a single perspective view, such as perspective view 3
  • the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D4 viewing content that represents perspective views 1 , 2 , 3 , and 4 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B based on the second view portion 2222 B representing perspective views that facilitate a center-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 4 , 6 , 8 , 10 , 12 , and 14 of 3D16 viewing content.
  • the first view portion 2222 A represents two perspective views, such as perspective views 5 and 9
  • the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 4 , 5 , 6 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 12 , and 14 .
  • third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 based on the second view portion 2222 representing perspective views that facilitate a right-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 9 , 11 , 13 , and 15 of 3D16 viewing content.
  • the first view portion 2222 A represents four perspective views (e.g., perspective views 8 , 10 , 12 , and 14 )
  • the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 , 12 , 13 , 14 , and 15 .
  • the examples provided herein are merely teaching examples and are not intended to be limiting.
  • FIGS. 23-29 depicts flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 of exemplary methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
  • Flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 may be performed by system 2100 shown in FIG. 21 or system 2200 shown in FIG. 22 , for example.
  • flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 are not limited to those embodiments. Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 .
  • step 2302 a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content is received via a first pathway.
  • the first data portion originates from a first source.
  • the first data portion is associated with a first perspective view.
  • the first data portion may comprise a two-dimensional portion of the three-dimensional viewing content, though the scope of the embodiments is not limited in this respect.
  • first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via first pathway 2120 A or 2220 A.
  • First view portion 2122 A or 2222 A originates from first source 2102 A or 2202 A.
  • a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway.
  • the second data portion originates from a second source.
  • the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
  • first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via second pathway 2120 B or 2220 B.
  • Second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B originates from second source 2102 B or 2202 B.
  • a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion.
  • second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A and the second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B.
  • flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402 .
  • a search for a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is initiated in response to a search instruction.
  • third circuitry 2216 initiates a search for second view portion 2222 B in response to search instruction 2238 .
  • the second data portion is received via a second pathway in response to initiating the search.
  • the second data portion originates from a second source.
  • the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
  • flowchart 2500 begins at step 2502 .
  • step 2502 an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received.
  • first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122 B.
  • acceptance of the offer is carried out. For instance, carrying out the acceptance of the offer may trigger a billing event regarding the second data portion.
  • third circuitry 2116 carries out acceptance of offer 2126 .
  • Third circuitry 2116 may provide acceptance 2128 to accept offer 2126 .
  • the second data portion is received via a second pathway.
  • the second data portion originates from a second source.
  • the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
  • first circuitry 2112 receives second view portion 2122 B via second pathway 2120 B.
  • flowchart 2600 begins at step 2602 .
  • an indication relating to the first data portion is delivered.
  • fourth circuitry 2118 delivers indication 2130 relating to first view portion 2122 A.
  • an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received.
  • the offer is based at least in part on the indication.
  • first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122 B.
  • Flowchart 2300 of FIG. 3 may further include the step shown in flowchart 2700 of FIG. 27 or the step shown in flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 .
  • flowchart 2700 includes step 2702 .
  • the second data portion is selected based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly that supports the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
  • third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222 B based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to screen 2206 , which supports visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2234 .
  • flowchart 2800 includes step 2802 .
  • the second data portion is selected based on viewer input.
  • third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222 B based on control signal 2236 , which is generated in response to viewer input.
  • FIG. 29 depicts an exemplary implementation of the method of flowchart 2300 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • flowchart 2900 begins at step 2902 .
  • a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content that comprises a two-dimensional portion is received via a first pathway.
  • the first data portion is associated with a single first perspective view.
  • the first data portion originates from a storage that is local to a device that causes a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
  • first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A via a first pathway 2120 A or 2220 A.
  • first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A comprises a two-dimensional portion and is associated with a single first perspective view. Further in accordance with this implementation, first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A originates from first source 2102 A or 2202 A, which may be local to a device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204 , for example.
  • a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway.
  • the second data portion is associated with at least one second perspective view.
  • the second data portion originates from a second source.
  • first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B via a second pathway 2120 B or 2220 B.
  • second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B is associated with at least one second perspective view.
  • second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B originates from second source 2102 B or 2202 B.
  • second source 2102 B or 2202 B may be local or remote to the device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204 .
  • the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion.
  • the three-dimensional viewing content represents at least two perspective views.
  • second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A and the second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B.
  • 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 represents at least two perspective views.
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 3000 that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment.
  • system 3000 includes first source 3002 A, second source 3002 B, media system 3004 , and screen 3006 .
  • First source 3002 A provides a first content instance 3022 A via a first pathway 3020 A.
  • Second source 3002 B provides a second content instance 3022 B via a second pathway 3020 B.
  • Each of the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B may represent any suitable number of perspective views.
  • a number of perspective views represented by the first content instance 3022 A and a number of perspective views represented by the second content instance 3022 B may be the same or different.
  • First source 3002 A and/or second source 3002 B may include multiple sources.
  • portions of the first content instance 3022 A may be provided by respective sources that are included in first source 3002 A.
  • Each portion of the first content instance 3022 A may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the first content instance 3022 A.
  • portions of the second content instance 3022 B may be provided by respective sources that are included in second source 3002 B.
  • Each portion of the second content instance 3022 B may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the second content instance 3022 B.
  • Media circuitry 3004 includes first circuitry 3012 and second circuitry 3014 .
  • First circuitry 3012 receives the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B. For example, if the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B are encoded, first circuitry 3012 may decode the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B for further processing by second circuitry 3014 .
  • Second circuitry 3014 generates first drive signal(s) 3024 A to direct a first configuration of a first region 3044 A of screen 3006 .
  • the first configuration supports display of the first content instance 3022 A.
  • Second circuitry 3014 further generates second drive signal(s) 3024 B to direct a second configuration of a second region 3044 B of screen 3006 .
  • the second configuration supports display of the second content instance 3022 B.
  • the second configuration is different from the first configuration.
  • second circuitry 3014 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112 , 1116 , 1912 , or 2016 ) for generating pixel array drive signals (e.g., drive signals 152 , 1156 , or 1952 ).
  • second circuitry 3014 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114 , or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014 ) for generating light manipulator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 154 , 1154 , 1954 , and/or 1956 ).
  • second circuitry 3014 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012 ) for generating light generator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 1152 ). Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024 A and 3024 B.
  • light generator driver circuitry e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012
  • drive signals 1152 Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024 A and 3024 B.
  • Screen 3006 includes first region 3044 A and second region 3044 B.
  • the first and second regions 3044 A and 3044 B may include respective portions of a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028 ), respective portions of one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026 ), and/or respective portions of a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022 ).
  • a pixel array e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028
  • light manipulators e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026
  • a light generator e.g., light generator 1122 or 20
  • the first drive signal(s) 3024 A may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in first region 3044 A.
  • the second drive signal(s) 3024 B may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in second region 3044 B.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart 3100 of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments.
  • flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102 .
  • first viewing content that originates from a first source is received via a first pathway.
  • first circuitry 3012 receives first content instance 3022 A via first pathway 3020 A.
  • the first content instance 3022 A originates from first source 3002 A.
  • second viewing content that originates from a second source is received via a second pathway.
  • first circuitry 3012 receives second content instance 3022 B via second pathway 3020 B.
  • the second content instance 3022 B originates from second source 3002 B.
  • the first pathway comprises a local pathway
  • the second pathway comprises a remote pathway.
  • a local pathway is a pathway from a local source.
  • a remote pathway is a pathway from a remote source. Examples of a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server. Examples of a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
  • a disc player e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player
  • a personal computer e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer
  • a personal media player e.g., a smart phone.
  • the first viewing content is two-dimensional content
  • the second viewing content is three-dimensional content.
  • the first viewing content represents a single perspective view.
  • the second viewing content represents multiple views, any two of which may be combined for perception as three-dimensional image(s).
  • the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content
  • the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content.
  • the first three-dimensional content may represent a first number of perspectives
  • the second three-dimensional content may represent a second number of perspectives.
  • the first number may be different from or the same as the first number.
  • the second viewing content may be related to the first viewing content or unrelated to the first viewing content. If the first viewing content and the second viewing content correspond to a common video event, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be related. Otherwise, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be unrelated.
  • a first configuration of a first region of a screen assembly is directed.
  • the first configuration supports display of the first viewing content.
  • second circuitry 3014 directs a first configuration of first region 3044 A of screen 3006 .
  • the first configuration of first region 3044 A supports display of first content instance 3022 A.
  • a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly is directed.
  • the second configuration supports display of the second viewing content.
  • the second configuration is different from the first configuration.
  • second circuitry 3014 directs a second configuration of second region 3044 B of screen 3006 that is different from the first configuration of first region 3044 A.
  • the second configuration of second region 3044 B supports display of second content instance 3022 B.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and a screen 3206 .
  • control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214 , which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.
  • Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212 , such as a communication bus.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212 .
  • the main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32 ) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212 , including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like.
  • secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3218 , a viewer tracking unit 3216 , and a media interface 3220 .
  • User input interface 3218 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
  • Viewer tracking unit 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of functionality for determining or estimating a location of one or more viewers of display system 3200 and/or a head orientation of one or more viewers of display system 3200 .
  • Viewer tracking unit may perform such functions using different types of sensors (e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like) or by using tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer.
  • sensors e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like
  • tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer.
  • Media interface 3220 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content.
  • media interface 3220 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like.
  • media interface 3220 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.
  • Media interface 3220 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.
  • Media interface 3220 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3222 .
  • Communication interface 3222 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3252 to another communication interface 3230 within driver circuitry 3204 , thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204 .
  • Communication medium 3252 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
  • driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3230 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3232 and adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234 .
  • Driver circuitry also optionally includes light generator driver circuitry 3236 .
  • Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3222 and communication interface 3230 ) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen 3206 , the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner.
  • pixel array driver circuitry 3232 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3242 within screen 3206
  • adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3244 within screen elements 3206
  • optional light generator driver circuitry 3236 is configured to send selected drive signals to an optional light generator 3246 within screen 3206 .
  • processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3220 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry 3204 to render such video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration.
  • the control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above.
  • the control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
  • driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled in a manner previously described to send coordinated drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen.
  • pixel array 3242 , adaptable light manipulator 3244 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and light generator 3246 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises an OLED/PLED pixel array), screen 3206 need not include light generator 3246 .
  • At least part of the function of generating control signals necessary to cause pixel array 3242 , adaptable light manipulator 3244 and light generator 3246 to render video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration is performed by drive signal processing circuitry 3238 which is integrated within driver circuitry 3204 .
  • Such circuitry may operate, for example, in conjunction with and/or under the control of processing unit 3214 to generate the necessary control signals.
  • control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a television, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone.
  • the link 3252 formed between communication interfaces 3222 and 3230 may be replaced by a direct connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212 .
  • control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor.
  • the set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.

Abstract

Techniques are described herein for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For example, portions of three-dimensional viewing content may be received via respective pathways from respective sources. A visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content may be caused based on the portions. In another example, instances of viewing content may be received via respective pathways from respective sources. Configurations of respective regions of a screen may be directed to support display of the respective instances.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/291,818, filed on Dec. 31, 2009, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • This application also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/303,119, filed on Feb. 10, 2010, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • This application is also related to the following U.S. patent applications, each of which also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 61/291,818 and 61/303,119 and each of which is incorporated by reference herein:
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display With Adaptable Parallax Barrier”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,461, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display Supporting Multiple Simultaneous 3D Views”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01210000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”;
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01240000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Coordinated Driving of Adaptable Light Manipulator, Backlighting and Pixel Array in Support of Adaptable 2D and 3D Displays”; and
      • U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01330000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D and Multi-View 3D Content”.
    BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention
  • The present invention relates to techniques for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content.
  • 2. Background Art
  • Images may be generated for display in various forms. For instance, television (TV) is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form. Conventionally, images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two dimensions. More recently, images are being provided in digital form for display in two dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”). Even more recently, images capable of being displayed in three dimensions are being generated.
  • Conventional displays may use a variety of techniques to achieve three-dimensional (3D) image viewing functionality. For example, various types of glasses have been developed that may be worn by users to view three-dimensional images displayed by a conventional display. Examples of such glasses include glasses that utilize color filters or polarized filters. In each case, the lenses of the glasses pass two-dimensional (2D) images of differing perspective to the user's left and right eyes. The images are combined in the visual center of the brain of the user to be perceived as a three-dimensional image. In another example, synchronized left eye, right eye liquid crystal display (LCD) shutter glasses may be used with conventional two-dimensional image displays to create a three-dimensional viewing illusion. In still another example, LCD display glasses are being used to display three-dimensional images to a user. The lenses of the LCD display glasses include corresponding displays that provide images of differing perspective to the user's eyes, to be perceived by the user as three-dimensional.
  • Problems exist with such techniques for viewing three-dimensional images. For instance, persons that use such displays and systems to view three-dimensional images may suffer from headaches, eyestrain, and/or nausea after long exposure. Furthermore, some content, such as two-dimensional text, may be more difficult to read and interpret when displayed three-dimensionally. To address these problems, some manufacturers have created display devices that may be toggled between three-dimensional viewing and two-dimensional viewing. A display device of this type may be switched to a three-dimensional mode for viewing of three-dimensional images, and may be switched to a two-dimensional mode for viewing of two-dimensional images (and/or to provide a respite from the viewing of three-dimensional images).
  • A parallax barrier is another example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions. A parallax barrier includes a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that each of a user's eyes sees a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax. A disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result. Conventional three-dimensional displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
  • Some conventional devices are capable of receiving portions of 2D content from different sources to be presented on a single screen. Other conventional devices are capable of receiving media guide text and program channels of media content wherein a remote control is used to produce guide text overlaying the media content on a single 2D screen. Similarly, a conventional browser may receive 2D graphic and textual content from many sources (e.g., different servers) and construct a single display within a single window. Yet other conventional devices are capable of receiving full 3D2 content from a single source. For example, such full 3D2 content may be downloaded from a server or retrieved from a removable or fixed storage. The single piece of 3D2 content can have a first portion that is destined for the left eye of a viewer and a second portion that is destined for the right eye of the viewer. These portions represent perspectives (a.k.a. camera views) of a common video event.
  • BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Methods, systems, and apparatuses are described for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content as shown in and/or described herein in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS/FIGURES
  • The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated herein and form a part of the specification, illustrate the present invention and, together with the description, further serve to explain the principles of the invention and to enable a person skilled in the pertinent art to make and use the invention.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system in accordance with an embodiment that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an alternate embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment in which different orientations of transparent and opaque slits are used to simultaneously support different viewer orientations.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart of an alternate exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a portion of a pixel array to which image pixels have been mapped to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIG. 8 to support a first three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 to support a second three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier and a light generator to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that utilizes a controllable backlight array to provide regional luminosity control in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes a pixel array disposed between a light generator and an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel of a display system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens that may be used in a displays system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 shows a side view of the adaptable lenticular lens of FIG. 17 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an alternate embodiment.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 are block diagrams of exemplary systems that support presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIGS. 23-29 depict flowcharts of methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an exemplary practical implementation of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional display system in accordance with an embodiment.
  • The present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, like reference numbers indicate identical or functionally similar elements. Additionally, the left-most digit(s) of a reference number identifies the drawing in which the reference number first appears.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION I. Introduction
  • The present specification discloses one or more embodiments that incorporate the features of the invention. The disclosed embodiment(s) merely exemplify the invention. The scope of the invention is not limited to the disclosed embodiment(s). The invention is defined by the claims appended hereto.
  • References in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
  • Furthermore, it should be understood that spatial descriptions (e.g., “above,” “below,” “up,” “left,” “right,” “down,” “top,” “bottom,” “vertical,” “horizontal,” etc.) used herein are for purposes of illustration only, and that practical implementations of the structures described herein can be spatially arranged in any orientation or manner.
  • Embodiments described herein provide systems and methods for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For instance, the viewing content may include multiple portions that originate from respective sources and that are received via respective paths. Each of the portions may include two-dimensional (2D) content or three-dimensional (3D) content. Two-dimensional (2D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more two-dimensional images. For instance, the two-dimensional content may represent a single perspective of a video event. Three-dimensional (3D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more three-dimensional images. For example, the three-dimensional content may represent multiple perspectives of a video event.
  • The viewing content may be displayed to a user among any number (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.) of regions of a screen, such as a fixed 2D screen, a fixed 3D screen, or an adaptable 3D screen. With respect to an adaptable 3D screen, the viewing content may be displayed among the regions by driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion. Some exemplary techniques for driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion are described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Coordinated Driving of Adaptable Light Manipulator, Backlighting and Pixel Array in Support of Adaptable 2D and 3D Displays,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • The adaptable light manipulator may comprise, for example, an adaptable lenticular lens such as that described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, or an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. As described in those applications, the adaptable light manipulator can be dynamically modified in order to accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot or switching between two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images. As further described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010 and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, the manner in which images are rendered to pixels of a pixel array used in conjunction with such an adaptable light manipulator may be coordinated with the state of the adaptable light manipulator to support a variety of viewing configurations.
  • Moreover, an adaptable light manipulator, a pixel array and a non-uniform light generator may be driven in a coordinated fashion. As described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, in a case of where the adaptable light manipulator is an adaptable parallax barrier, simultaneous presentation of two-dimensional and three-dimensional content (and/or various instances of three-dimensional content representing differing numbers of perspectives) via different regions of the same display is also enabled. This feature may be supported by a non-uniform light generator (such as a backlighting array) as described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • II. Exemplary Display Systems that Support Multiple Viewing Configurations
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system 140 that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1A, system 140 includes a media node 160, external sources 194A-194N, and external device(s) 196. Each of the external device(s) 196 includes a fixed 2D screen 167, a fixed 3D screen 169, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171. Each fixed 2D screen 167 has a fixed two-dimensional configuration. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content. Each fixed 3D screen 169 has a fixed three-dimensional configuration. A three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration may support presentation of any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes x viewpoints is said to be a 3Dx configuration, where x is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
  • Each fixed 2D screen 167, fixed 3D screen 169, and adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 is capable of supporting presentation of 3D portions 161A-161N of 3D content in respective regions of a screen surface. Regions of each screen 167, 169, and 171 are configured to support presentation of the respective 3D portions 161A-161N in the respective regions of the screen surface. The configurations of the various regions of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 may be different or the same. Some examples of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen are described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 1C and 2-20.
  • External sources 194A-194N are configured to provide the respective 3D portions 161A-161N of the 3D content to media node 160. External sources 194A-194N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 163A-163N to media node 160. Each of the offer contents 163A-163N includes an offer that relates to at least one 3D portion of the 3D content. For example, first external source 194A may provide a first 3D portion 161A to media node 160. First external source 194A may also provide first offer content 163A to media node 160 that relates to an Nth 3D portion 161N. If the offer from first external source 194A is accepted by a user, Nth external source 194N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161N to media node 160. Nth external source 194N may also provide Nth offer content 163N to media node 160 that relates to another 3D portion that may be provided by another of the external sources 194A-194N, and so on.
  • In another example, first external source 194A may provide the first 3D portion 161A to media node 160. Upon determining that the first 3D portion 161A is provided to media node 160, Nth external source 194N may provide Nth offer content 163N to media node 160 that relates to the Nth 3D portion 161N. If the offer from Nth external source 194N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 194N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161N to media node 160. Upon determining that the Nth 3D portion 161N is provided to media node 160, another of the external sources 194A-194N may provide its offer content to media node 160 that relates to a respective 3D portion of the 3D content, and so on.
  • External sources 194A-194N include circuitry 165A-165N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the 3D portions 161A-161N. For example, if first external source 194A provides first 3D portion 161A to media node 160, circuitry 165A may indicate that the first 3D portion 161A has been provided to media node 160 in an account of the user of media node 160. Circuitry 165A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first 3D portion 161A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first 3D portion, etc.
  • Media node 160 includes processing circuitry 162, storage 176, a screen assembly 178, media source interface(s) circuitry 180, and screen interface(s) circuitry 192. Media source interface(s) circuitry 180 receives the 3D portions 161A-161N of the 3D content from the respective external sources 194A-194N for processing by processing circuitry 162. Storage 176 queues the 3D portions 161A-161N as needed so that the portions 161A-161N may be synchronized for presentation. Storage 176 may include one or more internal sources that provide respective portions of the 3D content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N may be retrieved. Screen assembly 178 is configured to present the 3D content (e.g., simultaneously present the 3D portions 161A-161N) once the 3D portions 161A-161N are synchronized. Screen assembly 178 may be a fixed 2D screen assembly, a fixed 3D screen assembly, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly.
  • Processing circuitry 162 includes circuitry 164, 166, 168, 170, 172, and 174 and 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182. Circuitry 164 selects the first 3D portion 161A of the 3D content from first external source 194A. Circuitry 166 interacts with a second source (e.g., second external source 194B) to locate a second portion and offer based on the first 3D portion 161A. Circuitry 168 supports billing and account management regarding the various 3D portions 161A-161N. For instance, circuitry 168 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 194A-194N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective 3D portions 161A-161N.
  • Circuitry 170 supports operations pertaining to acceptance or rejection of each offer that is received by media node 160. For instance, circuitry 170 may inform external sources 194A-194N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 172 initiates delivery of the second 3D portion from the second source in response to location of the second 3D portion by circuitry 166. Circuitry 174 manages delivery of the 3D portions 161A-161N. For instance, circuitry 174 may communicate with circuitry 172 to authorize initiation of delivery of the second portion by circuitry 172. Circuitry 174 also supports queuing of the 3D portions 161A-161N. For example, circuitry 174 may determine an amount of storage 176 to be allocated for queuing of the 3D portions 161A-161N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 174 may monitor an amount of storage 176 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 176 to be allocated.
  • 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 performs operations on the 3D portions 161A-161N to facilitate presentation of the 3D content. 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 includes circuitry 184, 186, 188, and 190. Circuitry 184 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the 3D portions 161A-161N that are received from respective external sources 194A-194N, so that processing may be performed on the 3D portions 161A-161N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 186, 188, and/or 190, which are described below. Circuitry 184 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161A-161N, before the 3D content is delivered to external device(s) 196.
  • Circuitry 186 synchronizes frames of the 3D portions 161A-161N. For example, circuitry 186 may apply time offsets to one or more of the portions 161A-161N and/or adjust the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N in order to facilitate synchronization of the 3D portions 161A-161N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 186 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N, increase the frame rates of some of the 3D portions 161A-161N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the 3D portions 161A-161N, etc.
  • Circuitry 188 is configured to integrate the 3D portions 161A-161N into a single stream or file. Circuitry 190 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the respective 3D portions 161A-161N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. Circuitry 190 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161A-161N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161A-161N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the 3D portions 161A-161N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the 3D portions 161A-161N. Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N, increase the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N, crop one or more of the 3D portions 161A-161N (e.g., to fit a screen characteristic such as 3:4, 9:16, or windowing), etc. For instance, circuitry 190 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 provides the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161A-161N, to external device(s) 196 for presentation. Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161A-161N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161A-161N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 196.
  • For purposes of illustration, assume that a first portion comprising a desired video presentation is selected from an internal or external “first” source. This first portion may yield the presentation in 2D, for example, or 3D2. Either in response to a user's further search or “add” request (perhaps via a keypad or external remote control not shown, and at any time before or during the presentation of the first portion) or automatically based on the initial selection of the first portion, processing circuitry 160 assists or carries out location of a second portion of content related to the first portion. The internal or external location of the second portion is at a different source than that of the first portion.
  • An automatically identified second portion could be (but doesn't have to be) offered for possible rejection by the viewer. If accepted or if settings do not require the viewer's confirmation, processing work may be performed. For example, the second source portion may or may not have many differing characteristics from that of the first portion. Processing circuitry 160 may need to operate on at least one if not both of the portions to eliminate the differences. Processing circuitry 160 may synchronize, as well. For example, the first portion may be one-third of the way into the presentation, and the second portion may need an offset and synchronization. The output of processing circuitry 160 may be two independent files or streams or one combined stream. Such output may need to feed one or more fixed 2D, fixed 3D, and adaptive light manipulating internal or external screen assemblies. Processing circuitry 160 needs to make all of these things happen when needed, or provide support therefor. Other functionality of processing circuitry 160 can be appreciated with reference to the labels in the FIG. 1A, including payment processing, licensing, etc.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system 150 that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1B, system 150 includes a media node 101, external sources 131A-131N, and external device(s) 133. Each of the external device(s) 133 includes at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly. Each of the adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies is configured to receive media streams/files outputs with integrated or separate screen configuration commands (a.k.a. control signals). The screen commands specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. Some embodiments that include such adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 1C and 2-20.
  • External sources 131A-131N are configured to provide respective contents 135A-135N to media node 101. The contents 135A-135N may be fully independent and unrelated, or fully or partially related. External sources 131A-131N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 137A-137N to media node 101. Each of the offer contents 137A-137N includes an offer that relates to at least one of the contents 135A-135N. For example, first external source 131A may provide first content 135A to media node 101. First external source 131A may also provide first offer content 137A to media node 101 that relates to Nth content 135N. If the offer from first external source 131A is accepted by a user, Nth external source 131N may provide the Nth content 135N to media node 101. Nth external source 131N may also provide Nth offer content 137N to media node 101 that relates to other content that may be provided by another of the external sources 131A-131N, and so on.
  • In another example, first external source 131A may provide the first content 135A to media node 101. Upon determining that the first content 135A is provided to media node 101, Nth external source 131N may provide Nth offer content 137N to media node 101 that relates to the Nth content 135N. If the offer from Nth external source 131N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 131N may provide the Nth content 135N to media node 101. Upon determining that the Nth content 135N is provided to media node 101, another of the external sources 131A-131N may provide its offer content to media node 101 that relates to other content, and so on.
  • External sources 131A-131N include circuitry 139A-139N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the contents 135A-135N. For example, if first external source 131A provides first content 135A to media node 101, circuitry 139A may indicate that the first content 135A has been provided to media node 101 in an account of the user of media node 101. Circuitry 139A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first content 135A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first content, etc.
  • Media node 101 includes processing circuitry 103, storage 115, at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly 117, media source interface(s) circuitry 119, and screen interface(s) circuitry 129. Media source interface(s) circuitry 119 receives the contents 135A-135N from the respective external sources 131A-131N for processing by processing circuitry 103. Storage 115 queues the contents 135A-135N as needed so that the contents 135A-135N may be synchronized for presentation. Storage 115 may include one or more internal sources, each of which is capable of providing respective content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the contents 135A-135N may be retrieved. The at least one screen assembly 117 is configured to simultaneously present the contents 135A-135N once the contents 135A-135N are synchronized.
  • Processing circuitry 103 includes circuitry 105, 107, 109, 111, and 113 and content adjustments circuitry 121. Circuitry 105 provides software application (e.g., browser) based support for selection of the various contents 135A-135N. For instance, circuitry 105 may generate a graphical interface for enabling the viewer to select one or more of the contents 135A-135N for presentation. Circuitry 107 supports billing and account management regarding the various contents 135A-135N. For instance, circuitry 107 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 131A-131N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective contents 135A-135N.
  • Circuitry 109 provides viewer interface support for enabling the viewer to accept or reject each offer that is received by media node 101. For instance, circuitry 109 may inform external sources 131A-131N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 111 manages delivery of the contents 135A-135N. For instance, circuitry 111 may delay delivery of the various contents 135A-135N until the contents 135A-135N are synchronized. Circuitry 111 also supports queuing of the contents 135A-135N. For example, circuitry 111 may determine an amount of storage 115 to be allocated for queuing of the contents 135A-135N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 111 may monitor an amount of storage 115 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 115 to be allocated.
  • Circuitry 113 supports full and regional (re)configuration of adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assemblies. For instance, circuitry 113 may provide screen (re)configuration commands for configuring an entire adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly or one or more regions thereof based on any of a factors, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. In one example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be integrated into the one or more streams/files that are delivered toward the screen assembly. In another example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be sent externally from the aforementioned one or more streams/files via separate command signaling using the same communication pathway or a separate pathway that is independent from the pathway that is used for delivering the one or more streams/files.
  • Content adjustments circuitry 121 performs operations on the contents 135A-135N to facilitate presentation thereof. Content adjustments circuitry 121 includes circuitry 123, 125, and 127. Circuitry 123 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the contents 135A-135N that are received from respective external sources 131A-131N, so that processing may be performed on the contents 135A-135N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 125 and/or 127, which are described below. Circuitry 123 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the contents 135A-135N before delivery thereof to external device(s) 196.
  • Circuitry 125 supports outputting multiple streams or files or an integrated stream or file. For example, circuitry 125 may synchronize frames of the contents 135A-135N by applying time offsets to one or more of the contents 135A-135N and/or by adjusting the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135A-135N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 125 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the contents 135A-135N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135A-135N, increase the frame rates of some of the contents 135A-135N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the contents 135A-135N, etc.
  • Circuitry 127 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the contents 135A-135N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. Circuitry 127 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135A-135N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135A-135N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the contents 135A-135N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the contents 135A-135N. Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the contents 135A-135N, increase the resolution of one or more of the contents 135A-135N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the contents 135A-135N, change (e.g., increase or decrease) a frame rate that is associated with one or more of the contents 135A-135N, crop one or more of the contents 135A-135N, etc. For instance, circuitry 127 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
  • Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the various contents 135A-135N to external device(s) 133 for presentation. Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135A-135N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135A-135N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 133. Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the screen configuration commands that specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly of the external device(s) 133 is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. The screen configuration commands may be integrated among the contents 135A-135N or separate from the contents 135A-135N.
  • Although the circuitry and functionality illustrated with respect to FIGS. 1A and 1B may fall within one device housing (as illustrated), it may also be distributed across or fully contained within many of such media nodes. As such, the one or more media nodes may operate independently or in concert to carry out the various aspects of the illustrated functionality. A media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc.
  • The remainder of this section describes some exemplary display systems that include display elements, such as an adaptable light manipulator, a non-uniform light generator, and a pixel array, to enable multiple two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) viewing configurations. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration may include any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes n viewpoints is said to be a 3Dn configuration, where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to two. The configurations that are used to display the different video contents or portions thereof may be different or the same. Moreover, different video contents may be fully unrelated or at least partially related. For example, first content may be at least partially related to second content if the second content is 2D or 3D content and the first content includes movie text (e.g., closed caption text) that relates to the 2D or 3D content.
  • A. Example Display Systems Using Adaptable Parallax Barriers
  • FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 100 that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1C, display system 100 includes driver circuitry 102 and a screen 104, wherein screen 104 include a pixel array 122 and an adaptable parallax barrier 124. As further shown in FIG. 1C, driver circuitry 104 includes pixel array driver circuitry 112 and adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114.
  • Pixel array 122 comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged as a grid or other distribution). Pixel array 122 is a self-illuminating or light-generating pixel array such that the pixels of pixel array 122 each emit light included in light 132. Each pixel may be a separately addressable light source (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display such as an OLED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel of pixel array 122 may be individually controllable to vary color and intensity. In an embodiment, each pixel of pixel array 122 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 124 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 122. Barrier element array 142 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. Combinations of barrier elements may be configured to be selectively opaque or transparent to enable various effects. For example, the states of the barrier elements of barrier element array 142 may be configured such that light 132 emanating from pixel array 122 is filtered to produce filtered light 134, wherein filtered light 134 includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 136 in a viewing space 106.
  • Depending upon the implementation, each barrier element may have a round, square, or rectangular shape, and barrier element array 142 may have any number of rows of barrier elements that extend a vertical length of barrier element array 142. In another embodiment, each barrier element may have a “band” shape that extends a vertical length of barrier element array 142, such that barrier element array 142 includes a single horizontal row of barrier elements. Each barrier element may include one or more of such bands, and different regions of barrier element array 142 may include barrier elements that include different numbers of such bands.
  • It is noted that in some embodiments, barrier elements may be capable of being completely transparent or opaque, and in other embodiments, barrier elements may not be capable of being fully transparent or opaque. For instance, such barrier elements may be capable of being 95% transparent when considered to be “transparent” and may be capable of being 5% transparent when considered to be “opaque.” “Transparent” and “opaque” as used herein are intended to encompass barrier elements being substantially transparent (e.g., greater than 75% transparent, including completely transparent) and substantially opaque (e.g., less than 25% transparent, including completely opaque), respectively.
  • Driver circuitry 102 receives control signals 108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 1C). For example, control signals 108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B. The control signals 108 cause driver circuitry 102 to place screen 104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations. In particular, based on control signals 108, adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 transmits drive signals 154 that cause barrier element array 142 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration. The selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in corresponding display regions.
  • For example, FIG. 2 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 200 that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration. Adaptable parallax barrier 200 is an example of adaptable parallax barrier 124 of FIG. 1C. As shown in FIG. 2, adaptable parallax barrier 200 includes a barrier element array 202, which includes a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips (or “slits”) 206 a-206 g. As shown in FIG. 2, parallel non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g (non-blocking slits) are alternated with parallel blocking strips 208 a-208 g of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be blocking. In the example of FIG. 2, non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g and blocking strips 208 a-208 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 204, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty barrier elements 204) of barrier element array 202, although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions. Non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g and blocking strips 208 a-208 g form a parallax barrier configuration for adaptable parallax barrier 200. The spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of barrier elements 204 in barrier element array 202 to be non-blocking, to be alternated with blocking strips 208, as desired. For example, the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selected based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B. It will be recognized that hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of non-blocking strips 206 and blocking strips 208 may be present in adaptable parallax barrier 200.
  • FIG. 3 shows an alternative example of an adaptable parallax barrier 300 that has also been configured to support a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration. Similarly to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2, adaptable parallax barrier 300 includes a barrier element array 302, which includes a plurality of barrier elements 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28×1 array). Barrier elements 304 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of barrier elements 204 in FIG. 2, but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of barrier element array 302. As shown in FIG. 3, barrier element array 302 includes parallel non-blocking strips 306 a-306 g alternated with parallel blocking strips 308 a-308 g. In the example of FIG. 3, parallel non-blocking strips 306 a-306 g and parallel blocking strips 308 a-308 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 304, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one barrier element 304) of barrier element array 302. Adaptable parallax barrier 300 may be configured in accordance with control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example.
  • Each of adaptable parallax barriers 200 and 300, configured in the manner shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 respectively, filter light produced by a pixel array to form one or more three-dimensional views in a viewing space, thus supporting a three-dimensional viewing configuration. To achieve a two-dimensional viewing configuration, all of the barrier elements of either adaptable parallax barrier 200 or 300 can simply be placed in a non-blocking state. Additional details concerning how the adaptable parallax barriers operate to support such three-dimensional viewing may be found, for example, in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.”
  • In the adaptable parallax barrier configurations shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the entirety of the barrier element array is filled with parallel non-blocking strips to support three-dimensional viewing. In further embodiments, one or more regions of an adaptable parallax barrier may be filled with parallel non-blocking strips to deliver three-dimensional images, and one or more other regions of the adaptable parallax barrier may be rendered transparent to deliver two-dimensional images. Thus, a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions may be supported.
  • For instance, FIG. 4 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments. The arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example. Adaptable parallax barrier 400 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2, having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. In FIG. 4, a first region 402 of barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips that together fill first region 402. A second region 404 of barrier element array 202 is surrounded by first region 402. Second region 404 is a rectangular shaped region of barrier element array 202 that includes a two-dimensional array of barrier elements 204 that are non-blocking. Thus, in FIG. 4, barrier element array 202 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements of first region 402, and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements inside of second region 404. Note that alternatively, first region 402 may include all non-blocking barrier elements 202 to pass a two-dimensional image, and second region 404 may include parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips to pass a three-dimensional image. In further embodiments, adaptable parallax barrier 400 may have additional numbers, sizes, and arrangements of regions configured to pass different combinations of two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images.
  • In still further embodiments, different regions of an adaptable parallax barrier that have parallel non-blocking strips may have the parallel non-blocking strips oriented at different angles to deliver three-dimensional images to viewers that are oriented differently. Thus, a viewing configuration that mixes three-dimensional viewing regions having different viewing orientations may be supported.
  • For example, FIG. 5 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 500 in which transparent slits have different orientations, according to an example embodiment. The arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 500 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example. Adaptable parallax barrier 500 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2, having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. A first region 510 (e.g., a bottom half) of barrier element array 202 includes a first plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e (each having a width of two barrier elements 204). As shown in FIG. 5, parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e are alternated with parallel blocking strips 504 a-504 f of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of three barrier elements 204). Parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e are oriented in a first direction (e.g., along a vertical axis).
  • Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, a second region 512 (e.g., a top half) of barrier element array 202 includes a second plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d (each having a width of one barrier element 204). As shown in FIG. 5, parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d are alternated with parallel blocking strips 508 a-508 c of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of two barrier elements 204). Parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d are oriented in a second direction (e.g., along a horizontal axis).
  • As such, in FIG. 5, first and second pluralities of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e and 506 a-506 d are present in barrier element array 202 that are oriented perpendicularly to each other. The region of barrier element array 202 that includes first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented vertically (e.g., sitting upright or standing up). The region of barrier element array 202 that includes second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented horizontally (e.g., laying down). In this manner, users who are oriented differently relative to each other can still each be provided with a corresponding three-dimensional image that accommodates their position.
  • The foregoing adaptable parallax barriers and arrangements thereof have been described herein by way of example only. Additional adaptable parallax barriers and arrangements thereof may be used to support additional viewing configurations. For example, additional adaptable parallax barrier implementations and arrangements thereof are described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” and in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,461, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display Supporting Multiple Simultaneous 3D Views,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Returning now to the description of display system 100 of FIG. 1C, since a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 can be dynamically modified to support a particular viewing configuration, pixel array 122 must also be controlled to support the same viewing configuration. In particular, the rendering of pixels of an image (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) among the pixels of pixel array 122 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) must be handled in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124. This may entail, for example, changing a number of display pixels that represents each image pixel (i.e., changing the resolution of a displayed image) and/or changing which display pixels or groups thereof correspond to the respective image pixels (i.e., changing the locations at which the image pixels are displayed), in response to modification of a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124. Such changes may be implemented by a controller (not shown in FIG. 1C) via delivery of appropriate control signals 108 to pixel array driver circuitry 112.
  • For example, in one embodiment, when a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 supports a first viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108, pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the first viewing configuration. Furthermore, when the configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 is modified to support a second viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108, pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with the control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the second viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124) in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 6, the method of flowchart 600 begins at step 602. During step 602, a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator, such as adaptable parallax barrier 124, is modified. At step 604, a number of display pixels in a pixel array, such as pixel array 122, that represents each image pixel of a plurality of image pixels is changed in response to modifying the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
  • FIGS. 8 and 9 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 600. As shown in FIG. 8, a portion of a pixel array 800 includes a 16×16 array of display pixels. An example display pixel is shown as display pixel 802. In one embodiment, each display pixel comprises a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels as discussed above. A first image comprising a 4×4 array of image pixels (each shown depicting the letter “A” to indicate that each is included in the same image) is mapped to the display pixels such that 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel. An example of an image pixel is shown as image pixel 804. In FIG. 8, the first image is intended to represent an image that is viewed when an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array is configured to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration.
  • FIG. 9 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration. The three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the combined display of a first image and a second image across the same portion of pixel array 800. This means that the first image must be represented with only half the display pixels. To achieve this, the pixel array is controlled such that 2 rather than 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel of the first image (each still shown depicting the letter “A”). This corresponds to a decreased viewing resolution of the first image. The other half of the display pixels are now used to present each image pixel of a second image (each shown depicting the letter “B”). The image pixels associated with the different images are aligned with the adaptable light manipulator to achieve a desired three-dimensional viewing effect.
  • FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart 700 of another exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124) in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 7, the method of flowchart 700 begins at step 702. During step 702, a plurality of image pixels is mapped to a plurality of respective first subsets of display pixels in a pixel array, such as pixel array 122. At step 704, a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator that is positioned proximate to the pixel array is changed. For example, in an embodiment in which the adaptable light manipulator includes adaptable parallax barrier 124, a slit pattern, orientation, or the like, of adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be changed. At step 706, a mapping of the plurality of image pixels is changed from the plurality of respective first subsets of the display pixels to a plurality of respective second subsets of the display pixels in the pixel array to compensate for changing the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
  • FIGS. 9 and 10 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 700. As shown in FIG. 9, a portion of a pixel array 800 is used to simultaneously display a first image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “A” and a second image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “B.” As noted above, this display format is utilized to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration corresponding to a particular arrangement of an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array. FIG. 10 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a modified three-dimensional viewing configuration (e.g., in response to a changed location of a viewer or some other factor). The modified three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the display location of the first image and the second image to be shifted, as shown in FIG. 10. Thus, for example, rather than rendering image pixel 904 to the bottom-most two display pixels in the far-left column of array portion 800, the same image pixel 904 is now rendered to the bottom-most two display pixels in the second column from the left of array portion 800.
  • Numerous other methods may be used to control the rendering of image pixels to display pixels in support of a desired two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional viewing configuration implemented by an adaptable parallax barrier or other adaptable light manipulator. Additional details concerning such control of a pixel array may be found in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator.”
  • FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1100, which is another example of a display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations. As shown in FIG. 11, display system 1100 includes driver circuitry 1102 and a screen 1104, wherein screen 1104 include a light generator 1122, an adaptable parallax barrier 1124 and a pixel array 1126. As further shown in FIG. 11, driver circuitry 1102 includes light generator driver circuitry 1112, adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 and pixel array driver circuitry 1116.
  • Light generator 1122 emits light 1132. Adaptable parallax barrier 1124 is positioned proximate to light generator 1122. Barrier element array 1144 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 1124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. Barrier element array 1144 filters light 1132 received from light generator 1122 to generate filtered light 1134. Filtered light 1134 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image (e.g., formed by a pair of two-dimensional images in filtered light 1134) to be formed based on images subsequently imposed on filtered light 1134 by pixel array 1126.
  • Pixel array 1126 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged in a grid or other distribution) like pixel array 122 of FIG. 1C. However, pixel array 1126 is not self-illuminating, and instead is a light filter that imposes images (e.g., in the form of color, grayscale, etc.) on filtered light 1134 from adaptable parallax barrier 1124 to generate filtered light 1136 to include one or more images. Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be a separately addressable filter (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be individually controllable to vary the color imposed on the corresponding light passing through, and/or to vary the intensity of the passed light in filtered light 1136. In an embodiment, each pixel of pixel array 1126 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • Driver circuitry 1102 receives control signals 1108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 11). For example, control signals 1108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B. The control signals 1108 cause driver circuitry 1102 to place screen 1104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations. In particular, based on control signals 1108, adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 transmits drive signals 1154 that cause barrier element array 1144 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration. Likewise, based on control signals 1108, pixel array driver circuitry 1116 transmits drive signals 1156 to cause pixels of one or more images (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) to be rendered among the pixels of pixel array 1126 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 1124. The selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in different display regions.
  • As discussed in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier,” conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels. The backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels. When simultaneously displaying two-dimensional, three-dimensional and multi-view three-dimensional regions using an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views).
  • To address this issue, light generator 1122 includes a backlight array 1142 which is a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 1142 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source in backlight array 1142 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.
  • The amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 1142 can selectively controlled by drive signals 1152 generated by light generator driver circuitry 1112 so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of screen 1104 can also be controlled. This enables display system 1100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • To help illustrate this, FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1200 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above. Display system 1200 comprises one implementation of display system 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, display system 1200 includes a light generator 1202 that includes a backlight array 1212, an adaptable parallax barrier 1204 that includes a barrier element array 1222 and a display panel 1206 that includes a pixel array 1232. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
  • In accordance with the example configuration shown in FIG. 12, a first portion 1234 of pixel array 1232 and a first portion 1224 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content, a second portion 1236 of pixel array 1232 and a second portion 1226 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image, and a third portion of 1238 of pixel array 1232 and a third portion 1228 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image. To independently control the brightness of each of the first, second and third display regions, the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1214, a second portion 1216 and a third portion 1218 of backlight array 1212 can respectively be controlled. For example, the light sources within first portion 1214 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1216 and third portion 1218 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1214 is aligned. In further accordance with this example, the light sources within second portion 1216 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1218 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1218 is aligned. Of course, if uniform luminosity is not desired across the various display regions then other control schemes may be used.
  • Of course, the arrangement shown in FIG. 12 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, backlight array 1212 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • In the arrangement shown in FIG. 12, there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1212 and every display pixel in pixel array 1232. However, this need not be the case to achieve regional brightness control. For example, in certain embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232. For instance, in one embodiment, a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1212 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1232, wherein N is an integer greater than 1. In an embodiment in which the number of light sources in backlight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels in pixel array 1232, each light source may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1232, although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232.
  • Also, in the examples described above, light sources in backlight array 1212 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 1212. In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may be controllable both individually and in groups. It will be recognized that light generator 1202, adaptable parallax barrier 1204, and display panel 1206 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B.
  • It is also noted that although FIGS. 11 and 12 show display system configurations in which a barrier element array of an adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a pixel array, in alternate implementations the pixel array may be disposed between the backlight array and the barrier element array. Such an alternate implementation is shown in FIG. 13. In particular, FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1300 that includes a pixel array 1324 disposed between a light generator 1322 that includes a backlight array 1342 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1326 that includes a barrier element array 1344 to support the generation of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images perceivable in a viewing space 1306. In such alternate implementations, selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in backlight array 1342 may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of backlight array 1342, pixel array 1324 and barrier element array 1344. For example, light generator 1322. pixel array 1324, and/or adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B.
  • Other example display system implementations that utilize a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources are described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier.” That application also describes other approaches for controlling the brightness of different simultaneously-displayed display regions of a display system. Some of these approaches will be described below.
  • For example, to achieve independent region-by-region brightness control in a display system that includes a conventional backlight panel designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity, the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up a pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions can also be controlled. To help illustrate this, FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1400 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above. The regional brightness control scheme may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example. As shown in FIG. 14, display system 1400 includes a display panel 1402 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1404. Display system 1400 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 14. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
  • As further shown in FIG. 14, display panel 1402 includes a pixel array 1412. Each of the pixels in a first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 14), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in a second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by the pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1400, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Adaptable parallax barrier 1404 includes barrier element array 1422 that includes a first portion 1424 and a second portion 1426. Barrier element array 1422 is aligned with pixel array 1414 such that first portion 1424 of blocking region array 1422 overlays first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 overlays second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412. Adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry causes all the barrier elements within first portion 1424 of barrier element array 1422 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 1400. Furthermore, the adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry manipulates the barrier elements within second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1400.
  • Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 1424 of barrier element array 1422 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax by second portion 1426 of barrier element 1422. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behind pixel array 1412.
  • To address this issue, drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412. Alternatively or additionally, drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412. By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412, independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
  • Of course, the arrangement shown in FIG. 14 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1412 and blocking element array 1422 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 1412 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • In one embodiment, a regional brightness control scheme combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources as previously described with regional pixel intensity control. The advantages of such a control scheme will now be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel 1500. Display panel 1500 includes a pixel array 1502 that includes a first portion 1504 and a second portion 1506, wherein each of first portion 1504 and second portion 1506 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1502. It is to be assumed that first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion of a backlight array (not shown in FIG. 15), wherein the backlight array is similar to backlight array 1142 described above in reference to FIG. 11. Second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion of the backlight array. In one example, the amount of light emitted by each light source in the second portion of the backlight array to illuminate second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first portion of the backlight array to illuminate first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502. This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause a three-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 and an adaptable parallax barrier to appear to have a uniform brightness level with respect to a two-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1504 and the adaptable parallax barrier.
  • However, the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first and second portions of the backlight array to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1504 and 1506 of pixel array 1502 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts. In particular, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the pixels in boundary area 1512 immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502. This may be due to the fact that the increased luminosity provided by the light sources in the second portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 1512, causing those pixels to be brighter than desired. Conversely, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the pixels in boundary area 1514 immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502. This may be due to the fact that the reduced luminosity of the light sources in the first portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 1514, causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
  • To address this issue, an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 1512 or boundary region 1514 to compensate for the undesired visual effects. For example, driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1512 of pixel array 1502 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1512, thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the second portion of the backlight array. Alternatively or additionally, driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1514 of pixel array 1502 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1514, thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the first portion of the backlight array. By controlling the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 1512 and 1514 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
  • The illustration provided in FIG. 15 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control. Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
  • In additional embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination. Display system 100 described above in reference to FIG. 1C may be representative of such a system, provided that pixel array 122 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs. In accordance with such an implementation, the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up the OLED/PLED pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 100 can also be controlled. This enables display system 100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • Where OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect. For example, a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content. In this scenario, light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region. This may cause pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region. Conversely, pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region. To address this issue, it is possible to selectively increase or reduce the brightness of one or more OLED/PLED pixels in either perimeter area to reduce the “spill over” effect arising from the different brightness characteristics between the regions.
  • In still further embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach. Such an approach involves the use of a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier. The brightness regulation overlay is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion.
  • The brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels. In one example embodiment, an adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used. The combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself.
  • Control over the individual barrier elements of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay may be provided by using coordinated driver circuitry signaling. Such coordinate signaling may cause the pixels of the adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays. The regional brightness control scheme described above with reference to FIG. 15, which may include such coordinated signaling, may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator 1600 that includes an adaptable parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels. The exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 1600 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example. In FIG. 16, the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
  • A first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 1602. In accordance with the first exemplary configuration, a three-dimensional region 1604 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a two-dimensional region 1606 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels. The medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of two-dimensional region 1606 to better match that of three-dimensional region 1604. It is noted that in other example configurations, two-dimensional region 1606 could instead comprise a three-dimensional region having a number of views that is different than three-dimensional region 1604, thus also requiring brightness regulation.
  • In the first exemplary configuration, no boundary region compensation is performed. In the second exemplary configuration, which is shown below section line 1602, boundary region compensation is performed. For example, a boundary region 1610 within two-dimensional region 1606 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with three-dimensional region 1604. In contrast, the grayscale level of an inner portion 1608 of two-dimensional region 1606 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of two-dimensional region 1606 above section line 1602. As a further example, a first boundary region 1612 and a second boundary region 1614 within three-dimensional region 1604 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from two-dimensional region 1606. In contrast, an inner portion 1616 of three-dimensional region 1604 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
  • In one embodiment, the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black. Of course this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
  • In certain embodiments, adaptable light manipulator 1600 comprises the only component used in a display system for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation. In alternate embodiments, the display system further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels). Note that in certain embodiments (such as the one described above in reference to FIG. 16), adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented as an integrated adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay. However, in alternate embodiments, adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented using an adaptable parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel.
  • B. Example Display Systems Using Adaptable Lenticular Lenses
  • In display systems in accordance with further embodiments, rather than using an adaptable parallax barrier to perform light manipulation in support of multiple viewing configurations, an adaptable lenticular lens may be used. For example, with respect to example display system 100 of FIG. 1C, adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens. Likewise, with respect to example display system 1300 of FIG. 13, adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens. The configuration of such an adaptable lenticular lens may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example.
  • FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, adaptable lenticular lens 1700 includes a sub-lens array 1702. Sub-lens array 1702 includes a plurality of sub-lenses 1704 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged side-by-side in a row). Each sub-lens 1704 is shown in FIG. 17 as generally cylindrical in shape and having a substantially semi-circular cross-section, but in other embodiments may have other shapes. In FIG. 17, sub-lens array 1702 is shown to include eight sub-lenses for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting. For instance, sub-lens array 1702 may include any number (e.g., hundreds, thousands, etc.) of sub-lenses 1704. FIG. 18 shows a side view of adaptable lenticular lens 1700. In FIG. 18, light may be passed through adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in the direction of dotted arrow 1802 to be diverted. Adaptable lenticular lens 1700 is adaptable in that it can be modified to manipulate light in different ways in order to accommodate different viewing configurations. For example, in one embodiment, adaptable lenticular lens is made from an elastic material and can be stretched or shrunk in one or more directions in response to generated drive signals.
  • Further description regarding the use of an adaptable lenticular lens to deliver three-dimensional views is provided in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator.”
  • C. Example Display Systems Using Multiple Light Manipulators
  • Display systems in accordance with further embodiments may include multiple layers of light manipulators. Such display systems may enable multiple three-dimensional images to be displayed in a viewing space. The multiple light manipulating layers may enable spatial separation of the images. For instance, in accordance with one embodiment, a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display a first three-dimensional image in a first region of a viewing space (e.g., a left-side area), a second three-dimensional image in a second region of the viewing space (e.g., a central area), a third three-dimensional image in a third region of the viewing space (e.g., a right-side area), etc. In fact, a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display any number of spatially separated three-dimensional images as desired for a particular application (e.g., according to a number and spacing of viewers in the viewing space, etc.).
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1900 that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, display system 1900 includes driver circuitry 1902 and a screen 1904, wherein screen 1904 includes a pixel array 1922, a first light manipulator 1924 and a second light manipulator 1926. As shown in FIG. 19, first light manipulator 1924 includes first light manipulator elements 1942 and second light manipulator 1926 includes second light manipulator elements 1944. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19, driver circuitry 1902 includes pixel array driver circuitry 1912 and light manipulator driver circuitry 1914.
  • Light 1932 is received at first light manipulator 1924 from pixel array 1922. Pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 based on a control signal 1908 received from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 19) and drive signals 1952 may be received by pixel array 1922 to generate light 1932. For example, control signal 1908 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B. Each pixel of pixel array 1922 may generate light that is received at first light manipulator 1924. In an embodiment, pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 to cause pixel array 1922 to emit light 1932 containing a plurality of images corresponding to the sets of pixels.
  • First light manipulator 1924 may be configured to manipulate light 1932 received from pixel array 1922. As shown in FIG. 19, first light manipulator 1924 includes light manipulator elements 1942 configured to perform manipulating (e.g., filtering, diverting, etc.) of light 1932 to generate manipulated light 1934. Light manipulator elements 1942 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by first light manipulator 1924. First light manipulator 1924 may perform filtering in a similar manner as an adaptable parallax barrier described above or in other manner. In another embodiment, first light manipulator 1924 may include a lenticular lens that diverts light 1932 to perform light manipulating, generating manipulated light 1934. In an embodiment, light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1954 based on control signal 1908 received by driver circuitry 1902 to cause light manipulator elements 1942 to manipulate light 1932 as desired.
  • Manipulated light 1934 is received by second light manipulator 1926 to generate manipulated light 1936 that includes a plurality of three-dimensional images 1962A-1962N formed in a viewing space 1906. It will be recognized that manipulated light 1936 may include any number N of three-dimensional images. As shown in FIG. 19, second light manipulator 1926 includes light manipulator elements 1944 configured to perform manipulating of manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936. Light manipulator elements 1944 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by second light manipulator 1926. In an embodiment, light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1956 based on control signal 1908 to cause light manipulator elements 1944 to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 including three-dimensional images 1962A-1962N as desired. In embodiments, second light manipulator 1926 may include an adaptable parallax barrier or lenticular lens configured to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936.
  • As such, screen 1904 of display system 1900 supports multiple viewers with media content in the form of three-dimensional images or views. Screen 1904 may provide a first three-dimensional view based on first three-dimensional media content to a first viewer, a second three-dimensional view based on second three-dimensional media content to a second viewer, and optionally further three-dimensional views based on further three-dimensional media content to further viewers. First and second light manipulators 1924 and 1926 each cause three-dimensional media content to be presented to a corresponding viewer via a corresponding area of screen 1904, with each viewer being enabled to view corresponding media content without viewing media content directed to other viewers. Furthermore, the areas of screen 1904 that provide the various three-dimensional views of media content overlap each other at least in part. In the embodiment of FIG. 19, the areas may be the same area. As such, multiple three-dimensional views that are each viewable by a corresponding viewer may be delivered by a single screen. Embodiments of display system 1900 may also be configured to generate two-dimensional views, as well as any combination of one or more two-dimensional views simultaneously with one or more three-dimensional views.
  • FIG. 20 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 2000, which is a further example of a display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers. Like display system 1900 of FIG. 19, display system 2000 is configured to display multiple three-dimensional images 2062A-2062N in a viewing space 2006 in a spatially separated manner. As shown in FIG. 20, display system 2000 includes driver circuitry 2002 and a screen 2004, wherein screen 2004 includes a light generator 2022, a first light manipulator 2024, a second light manipulator 2026 and a pixel array 2028. As shown in FIG. 20, light generator 2022 optionally includes a backlight array 2042, first light manipulator 2024 includes first light manipulator elements 2044, and second light manipulator 2026 includes second light manipulator elements 2046. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20, driver circuitry 2002 receives control signals 2008 and includes light generator driver circuitry 2012, light manipulator driver circuitry 2014, and pixel array driver circuitry 2016. Control signals 2008 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B, for example. Light generator driver circuitry 2012, light manipulator driver circuitry 2014, and pixel array driver circuitry 2016 may generate drive signals to perform their respective functions based on control signals 2008. As shown in FIG. 20, first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026 are positioned between light generator 2022 and pixel array 2028. In another embodiment, pixel array 2028 may instead be located between first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026.
  • III. Exemplary Techniques for Supporting Presentation of Multi-Path and Multi-Source Viewing Content
  • This section describes exemplary systems and methods that support presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For example, FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21, system 2100 includes a first source 2102A, a second source 2102B, a media circuitry 2104, and a screen 2106. First source 2102A provides first a view portion 2122A of three-dimensional (3D) viewing content 2134 via a first pathway 2120A. First view portion 2122A represents a first subset of perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134. Second source 2102B provides a second view portion 2122B of the 3D viewing content 2134 via a second pathway 2120B. The second view portion 2122B represents a second subset of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134. Each of the first and second subsets may include any suitable number (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134. A number of the perspective views that are included in the first subset and a number of the perspective views that are included in the second subset may be the same or different.
  • In some embodiments, second source 2102B provides a difference file in lieu of the second view portion 2122B. The difference file defines a difference between the first view portion 2122A and the second view portion 2122B. Although the following discussion refers repeatedly to the second view portion 2122B, it will be recognized that the discussion also applies if second source 2102B provides the difference file in lieu of the second view portion 2122B.
  • Each of first and second sources 2102A and 2102B may be a remote source or a local source. Examples of a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server. Examples of a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
  • Each of the first and second pathways 2120A and 2120B may include one or more local device pathways, point-to-point links, and/or pathways in a hybrid fiber coaxial (HFC) network, a wide-area network (e.g., the Internet), a local area network (LAN), another type of network, or a combination thereof. Each of the first and second pathways 2120A and 2120B may support wired, wireless, or both transmission media, including satellite, terrestrial (e.g., fiber optic, copper, twisted pair, coaxial, or the like), radio, microwave, free-space optics, and/or any other form or method of transmission.
  • Media circuitry 2104 is configured to process the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B to support presentation of 3D viewing content 2134. Media circuitry 2104 includes first circuitry 2112, second circuitry 2114, third circuitry 2116, and fourth circuitry 2118. First circuitry 2112 receives the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B. For example, if the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B are encoded, first circuitry 2112 may decode the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B for further processing by second circuitry 2114. In accordance with this example, if first circuitry 2112 receives the difference file in lieu of the second view portion 2122B from second source 2102B, first circuitry 2112 may decode the first view portion 2122A and the difference file in accordance with one or more techniques described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D and Multi-View 3D Content,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Second circuitry 2114 generates drive signal(s) 2124 based on the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B. The drive signal(s) 2124 are intended to control screen 2106 to support a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content 2134. For example, second circuitry 2114 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112, 1116, 1912, or 2016) for controlling a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122, 1126, 1922, or 2028) in screen 2106. In another example, second circuitry 2114 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114, or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014) for controlling one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124, and/or light manipulator(s) 1924, 1926, 2024 and/or 2026) in screen 2106. In yet another example, second circuitry 2114 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012) for controlling a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022) in screen 2106.
  • Second circuitry 2114 may synchronize the first view portion 2122A and the second view portion 2122B. Second circuitry may buffer the first view portion 2122A and/or the second view portion 2122B to perform the synchronization. Such buffering may enable second circuitry 2114 to shift the first view portion 2122A and/or the second view portion 2122B with respect to time to align frames that are included in the second view portion 2122B with corresponding frames that are included in the first view portion 2122A, or vice versa. In accordance with this example, second circuitry 2114 generates the drive signal(s) in response to synchronizing the first and second view portions 2122A and 2122B.
  • Third circuitry 2116 responds to offers that are provided by offer system 2108. Third circuitry 2116 receives the offers via first circuitry 2112. As shown in FIG. 21, first circuitry 2112 receives an offer 2126 that relates to second view portion 2122B from offer system 2108. First circuitry 2112 forwards the offer 2126 to third circuitry 2116. In an example, third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on one or more predetermined criteria. Such criteria may require, for example, that a cost that is specified by the offer 2126 be less than a cost threshold, that the offer 2126 specify one or more perspective views represented by the second view portion 2122B that are included among one or more designated perspective views, etc. In another example, third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on input from a viewer. In accordance with this example, third circuitry 2116 may send a request regarding the offer 2126 to the viewer and determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on the viewer's response to the request.
  • Third circuitry 2116 is shown in FIG. 21 to provide an acceptance 2128 of the offer 2126 to offer system 2108 for purposes of illustration. Provision of the acceptance 2128 by third circuitry 2116 may trigger any of a variety of events. For example, second source 2102B may provide the second view portion 2122B to first circuitry 2112 in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128. In another example, offer system 2108 may provide an enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 that enables media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122B in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128. For instance, the enabling signal 2132 may include information, such as a passcode or a decryption key, that first circuitry 2112 may use to obtain access to the second view portion 2122B. In yet another example, third circuitry 2116 may trigger a billing event regarding the second view portion 2122B based at least in part on provision of the acceptance 2128. For instance, the billing event may involve billing the viewer a cost that is specified in the offer 2126.
  • The discussion above regarding the offer 2132 and the acceptance 2128 is provided for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting. It will be recognized that second source 2102B may provide the second view portion 2122B to first circuitry 2112 regardless whether the offer 2126 and the acceptance 2128 are present. Moreover, first circuitry 2112 may be capable of accessing the second view portion 2122B regardless whether first circuitry 2112 receives the enabling signal 2132.
  • Fourth circuitry 2108 determines that the first view portion 2122A is received by first circuitry 2112. For instance, fourth circuitry 2108 may receive an indicator from first circuitry 2112 that indicates receipt of the first view portion 2122A. Upon determining that the first view portion 2122A is received, fourth circuitry 2108 delivers an indication 2130 relating to the first view portion 2122A to offer system 2108. The indication 2130 indicates that the first view portion 2122A is received by media circuitry 2104. In an embodiment, first circuitry 2112 receives the offer 2126 from offer system 2108 in response to fourth circuitry 2118 providing the indication 2130 to offer system 2108.
  • Offer system 2108 provides the offer 2126 relating to the second view portion 2122B to first circuitry 2112. Offer system 2108 may receive the acceptance 2128 from third circuitry 2116 is response to providing the offer 2126. In one embodiment, upon receiving the acceptance 2128, offer system 2108 provides then instruction 2134 to second source 2102B. The instruction 2134 instructs second source 2102B to deliver the second view portion 2122B to media circuitry 2104. Accordingly, second source may not deliver the second view portion 2122B to media circuitry 2104 until receipt of the instruction 2134. In another embodiment, upon receiving the acceptance 2128, offer system 2108 provides the enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 for enabling media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122B.
  • The output of media circuitry 2104 comprises the drive signal(s) 2124. Screen 2106 presents the 3D viewing content 2134 in viewing space 2110 based on the drive signal(s) 2124. As described above, screen 2106 may include a pixel array, one or more light manipulators, and/or a light generator for supporting presentation of the 3D viewing content 2134. Screen 2106 may be any suitable type of screen, including but not limited to an LCD screen, a plasma screen, a light emitting device (LED) screen (e.g., an OLED (organic LED) screen), etc.
  • It will be recognized that although first circuitry 2112, second circuitry 2114, third circuitry 2116, and fourth circuitry 2118 are labeled as such, the functionality of first circuitry 2112, second circuitry 2114, third circuitry 2116, and fourth circuitry 2118 may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. Moreover, system 2100 may not include one or more of first source 2102A, second source 2102B, screen 2106, offer system 2108, first circuitry 2112, second circuitry 2114, third circuitry 2116, and/or fourth circuitry 2118. Furthermore, system 2100 may include elements in addition to or in lieu of first source 2102A, second source 2102B, screen 2106, offer system 2108, first circuitry 2112, second circuitry 2114, third circuitry 2116, and/or fourth circuitry 2118.
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram of another exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 22, display system 2200 includes a first source 2202A, a second source 2202B, media circuitry 2204, and a screen 2206. First and second sources 2202A and 2202B and screen 2206 operate in like manner to first and second sources 2102A and 2102B and screen 2106, as described above with reference to FIG. 21. For instance, first and second sources 2202A and 2202B provide respective first and second view portions 2222A and 2222B via respective first and second pathways 2220A and 2220B to media circuitry 2104. Screen 2206 presents 3D viewing content 2234 in viewing space 2210 based on drive signal(s) 2224 that are received from media circuitry 2204.
  • Media circuitry 2204 includes first circuitry 2212, second circuitry 2214, and third circuitry 2216. First and second circuitry 2212 and 2214 operate in like manner to first and second circuitry 2112 and 2114, as described above with reference to FIG. 21. For instance, first circuitry 2212 receives the first and second view portions 2222A and 2222B from first and second sources 2202A and 2202B. Second circuitry 2214 generates the drive signal(s) 2224 based on the first and second view portions 2222A and 2222B.
  • First circuitry 2212 is shown in FIG. 22 to receive a control signal 2236, a search instruction 2238, and an orientation indication 2240 for illustrative purposes. It will be recognized that first circuitry 2212 need not necessarily receive each of the control signal 2236, the search instruction 2238, and the orientation indication 2240. For instance, first circuitry may receive any one or more of the control signal 2236, the search instruction 2238, and/or the orientation indication 2240.
  • The control signal 2236 is generated in response to viewer input. For instance, the control signal 2236 may specify one or more portions or perspective views that are identified by the viewer input. First circuitry 2212 may receive the control signal 2236 from a user input interface that is accessible to the viewer. The user input interface may be a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors. In an embodiment, third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222B based on the control signal 2236. For instance, third circuitry 2216 may review available portions of content to identify the portion(s) that are specified by the control signal 2236 or that represent perspective views that are specified by the control signal 2236. In accordance with this embodiment, third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222B in response to the second view portion 2222B including the identified portion(s).
  • The search instruction 2238 is intended to initiate a search for portion(s) of content that may be combined with the first view portion 2222A for presentation of the 3D viewing content 2234. The search instruction 2238 may be generated by a user input interface in response to viewer input, for example. In an embodiment, third circuitry 2216 initiates the search based on the search instruction 2238. In accordance with this embodiment, first circuitry 2212 may receive the second view portion 2222B in response to initiation of the search.
  • The orientation indication 2240 indicates an orientation of the viewer with respect to screen 2206. For example, the orientation indication 2240 may be received from a device that is worn by the viewer, held by the viewer, sitting in the viewer's lap, in the viewer's pocket, sitting next the viewer, etc. In another example, the orientation indication 2240 may be received in response to a distancing signal that is transmitted toward the viewer by third circuitry 2216. In accordance with this example, third circuitry 2216 may determine an orientation (e.g., location) of the viewer based on a difference between a time at which third circuitry 2216 transmits the distancing signal and a time at which third circuitry receives the orientation indication 2240. For instance, a reflection of the distancing signal from the viewer may be received by third circuitry 2216 as the orientation indication 2240.
  • In an embodiment, third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222B based on the orientation of the viewer, as indicated by the orientation indication 2240. As shown in FIG. 22, third circuitry 2216 provides a selection instruction 2242 to second source 2202B. The selection instruction 2242 instructs second source 2202B to provide the second view portion 2222B to media circuitry 2204.
  • In an example, if the orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is toward a left side of screen 2206, third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222B based on the second view portion 2222B representing perspective views that facilitate a left-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 1, 2, and 4 of 3D8 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if the first view portion 2222A represents a single perspective view, such as perspective view 3, the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D4 viewing content that represents perspective views 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • In another example, if the orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is substantially aligned with a center of screen 2206, third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222B based on the second view portion 2222B representing perspective views that facilitate a center-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 of 3D16 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if the first view portion 2222A represents two perspective views, such as perspective views 5 and 9, the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, and 14.
  • In yet another example, if the orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is toward a right side of screen 2206, third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 based on the second view portion 2222 representing perspective views that facilitate a right-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 9, 11, 13, and 15 of 3D16 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if the first view portion 2222A represents four perspective views (e.g., perspective views 8, 10, 12, and 14), the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15. The examples provided herein are merely teaching examples and are not intended to be limiting.
  • Presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content may be supported in a variety of ways according to embodiments. For instance, FIGS. 23-29 depicts flowcharts 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, and 2900 of exemplary methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments. Flowcharts 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, and 2900 may be performed by system 2100 shown in FIG. 21 or system 2200 shown in FIG. 22, for example. However the methods of flowcharts 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, and 2900 are not limited to those embodiments. Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowcharts 2300, 2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, and 2900.
  • As shown in FIG. 23, flowchart 2300 begins with step 2302. In step 2302, a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content is received via a first pathway. The first data portion originates from a first source. The first data portion is associated with a first perspective view. For instance, the first data portion may comprise a two-dimensional portion of the three-dimensional viewing content, though the scope of the embodiments is not limited in this respect. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122A or 2222A of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via first pathway 2120A or 2220A. First view portion 2122A or 2222A originates from first source 2102A or 2202A.
  • At step 2304, a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122B or 2222B of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via second pathway 2120B or 2220B. Second view portion 2122B or 2222B originates from second source 2102B or 2202B.
  • At step 2306, a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion. In an exemplary implementation, second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122A or 2222A and the second view portion 2122B or 2222B.
  • In an embodiment, instead of performing step 2304 of flowchart 2300, the steps shown in flowchart 2400 or flowchart 2500 of respective FIG. 24 or 25 may be performed. As shown in FIG. 24, flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402. In step 2402, a search for a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is initiated in response to a search instruction. In an exemplary implementation, third circuitry 2216 initiates a search for second view portion 2222B in response to search instruction 2238.
  • At step 2404, the second data portion is received via a second pathway in response to initiating the search. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2212 second view portion 2222B.
  • As shown in FIG. 25, flowchart 2500 begins at step 2502. In step 2502, an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122B.
  • At step 2504, acceptance of the offer is carried out. For instance, carrying out the acceptance of the offer may trigger a billing event regarding the second data portion. In an exemplary implementation, third circuitry 2116 carries out acceptance of offer 2126. For instance, Third circuitry 2116 may provide acceptance 2128 to accept offer 2126.
  • At step 2506, the second data portion is received via a second pathway. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 receives second view portion 2122B via second pathway 2120B.
  • In an embodiment, instead of performing step 2502 of flowchart 2500, the steps shown in flowchart 2600 of FIG. 26 may be performed. As shown in FIG. 26, flowchart 2600 begins at step 2602. In step 2602, an indication relating to the first data portion is delivered. In an exemplary implementation, fourth circuitry 2118 delivers indication 2130 relating to first view portion 2122A.
  • At step 2604, an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received. The offer is based at least in part on the indication. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122B.
  • Flowchart 2300 of FIG. 3 may further include the step shown in flowchart 2700 of FIG. 27 or the step shown in flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 27, flowchart 2700 includes step 2702. At step 2702, the second data portion is selected based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly that supports the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content. In an exemplary implementation, third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222B based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to screen 2206, which supports visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2234.
  • As shown in FIG. 28, flowchart 2800 includes step 2802. At step 2802, the second data portion is selected based on viewer input. In an exemplary implementation, third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222B based on control signal 2236, which is generated in response to viewer input.
  • FIG. 29 depicts an exemplary implementation of the method of flowchart 2300 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 29, flowchart 2900 begins at step 2902. In step 2902, a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content that comprises a two-dimensional portion is received via a first pathway. The first data portion is associated with a single first perspective view. The first data portion originates from a storage that is local to a device that causes a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122A or 2222A via a first pathway 2120A or 2220A. In accordance with this implementation, first view portion 2122A or 2222A comprises a two-dimensional portion and is associated with a single first perspective view. Further in accordance with this implementation, first view portion 2122A or 2222A originates from first source 2102A or 2202A, which may be local to a device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204, for example.
  • At step 2904, a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway. The second data portion is associated with at least one second perspective view. The second data portion originates from a second source. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122B or 2222B via a second pathway 2120B or 2220B. In accordance with this implementation, second view portion 2122B or 2222B is associated with at least one second perspective view. Further in accordance with this implementation, second view portion 2122B or 2222B originates from second source 2102B or 2202B. For instance, second source 2102B or 2202B may be local or remote to the device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204.
  • At step 2906, the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion. The three-dimensional viewing content represents at least two perspective views. In an exemplary implementation, second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122A or 2222A and the second view portion 2122B or 2222B. In accordance with this exemplary implementation, 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 represents at least two perspective views.
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 3000 that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 30, system 3000 includes first source 3002A, second source 3002B, media system 3004, and screen 3006. First source 3002A provides a first content instance 3022A via a first pathway 3020A. Second source 3002B provides a second content instance 3022B via a second pathway 3020B. Each of the first and second content instances 3022A and 3022B may represent any suitable number of perspective views. A number of perspective views represented by the first content instance 3022A and a number of perspective views represented by the second content instance 3022B may be the same or different.
  • First source 3002A and/or second source 3002B may include multiple sources. For example, portions of the first content instance 3022A may be provided by respective sources that are included in first source 3002A. Each portion of the first content instance 3022A may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the first content instance 3022A. In another example, portions of the second content instance 3022B may be provided by respective sources that are included in second source 3002B. Each portion of the second content instance 3022B may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the second content instance 3022B.
  • Media circuitry 3004 includes first circuitry 3012 and second circuitry 3014. First circuitry 3012 receives the first and second content instances 3022A and 3022B. For example, if the first and second content instances 3022A and 3022B are encoded, first circuitry 3012 may decode the first and second content instances 3022A and 3022B for further processing by second circuitry 3014.
  • Second circuitry 3014 generates first drive signal(s) 3024A to direct a first configuration of a first region 3044A of screen 3006. The first configuration supports display of the first content instance 3022A. Second circuitry 3014 further generates second drive signal(s) 3024B to direct a second configuration of a second region 3044B of screen 3006. The second configuration supports display of the second content instance 3022B. The second configuration is different from the first configuration.
  • For example, second circuitry 3014 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112, 1116, 1912, or 2016) for generating pixel array drive signals (e.g., drive signals 152, 1156, or 1952). In another example, second circuitry 3014 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114, or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014) for generating light manipulator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 154, 1154, 1954, and/or 1956). In yet another example, second circuitry 3014 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012) for generating light generator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 1152). Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024A and 3024B.
  • Screen 3006 includes first region 3044A and second region 3044B. The first and second regions 3044A and 3044B may include respective portions of a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122, 1126, 1922, or 2028), respective portions of one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124, and/or light manipulator(s) 1924, 1926, 2024 and/or 2026), and/or respective portions of a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022). For instance, the first drive signal(s) 3024A may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in first region 3044A. The second drive signal(s) 3024B may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in second region 3044B.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart 3100 of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments. As shown in FIG. 31, flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102. In step 3102, first viewing content that originates from a first source is received via a first pathway. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 3012 receives first content instance 3022A via first pathway 3020A. In accordance with this implementation, the first content instance 3022A originates from first source 3002A.
  • At step 3104, second viewing content that originates from a second source is received via a second pathway. In an exemplary implementation, first circuitry 3012 receives second content instance 3022B via second pathway 3020B. In accordance with this implementation, the second content instance 3022B originates from second source 3002B.
  • In an embodiment, the first pathway comprises a local pathway, and the second pathway comprises a remote pathway. A local pathway is a pathway from a local source. A remote pathway is a pathway from a remote source. Examples of a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server. Examples of a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
  • In another embodiment, the first viewing content is two-dimensional content, and the second viewing content is three-dimensional content. In accordance with this embodiment, the first viewing content represents a single perspective view. In further accordance with this embodiment, the second viewing content represents multiple views, any two of which may be combined for perception as three-dimensional image(s).
  • In yet another embodiment, the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content, and the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content. The first three-dimensional content may represent a first number of perspectives, and the second three-dimensional content may represent a second number of perspectives. The first number may be different from or the same as the first number.
  • The second viewing content may be related to the first viewing content or unrelated to the first viewing content. If the first viewing content and the second viewing content correspond to a common video event, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be related. Otherwise, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be unrelated.
  • At step 3106, a first configuration of a first region of a screen assembly is directed. The first configuration supports display of the first viewing content. In an exemplary implementation, second circuitry 3014 directs a first configuration of first region 3044A of screen 3006. In accordance with this implementation, the first configuration of first region 3044A supports display of first content instance 3022A.
  • At step 3108, a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly is directed. The second configuration supports display of the second viewing content. The second configuration is different from the first configuration. In an exemplary implementation, second circuitry 3014 directs a second configuration of second region 3044B of screen 3006 that is different from the first configuration of first region 3044A. In accordance with this implementation, the second configuration of second region 3044B supports display of second content instance 3022B.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32, display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202, driver circuitry 3204 and a screen 3206.
  • As shown in FIG. 32, control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214, which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores. Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212, such as a communication bus. Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212. The main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212, including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like. Each of these secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3218, a viewer tracking unit 3216, and a media interface 3220. User input interface 3218 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
  • Viewer tracking unit 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of functionality for determining or estimating a location of one or more viewers of display system 3200 and/or a head orientation of one or more viewers of display system 3200. Viewer tracking unit may perform such functions using different types of sensors (e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like) or by using tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer.
  • Media interface 3220 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content. In certain implementations, media interface 3220 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like. In such implementations, media interface 3220 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface. Media interface 3220 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like. Media interface 3220 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3222. Communication interface 3222 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3252 to another communication interface 3230 within driver circuitry 3204, thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204. Communication medium 3252 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
  • As shown in FIG. 32, driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3230 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3232 and adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234. Driver circuitry also optionally includes light generator driver circuitry 3236. Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3222 and communication interface 3230) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen 3206, the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner. In particular, pixel array driver circuitry 3232 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3242 within screen 3206, adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3244 within screen elements 3206, and optional light generator driver circuitry 3236 is configured to send selected drive signals to an optional light generator 3246 within screen 3206.
  • In one example mode of operation, processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3220 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry 3204 to render such video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration. The control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above. The control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
  • Among other features, driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled in a manner previously described to send coordinated drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen. The manner in which pixel array 3242, adaptable light manipulator 3244 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and light generator 3246 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises an OLED/PLED pixel array), screen 3206 need not include light generator 3246.
  • In one embodiment, at least part of the function of generating control signals necessary to cause pixel array 3242, adaptable light manipulator 3244 and light generator 3246 to render video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration is performed by drive signal processing circuitry 3238 which is integrated within driver circuitry 3204. Such circuitry may operate, for example, in conjunction with and/or under the control of processing unit 3214 to generate the necessary control signals.
  • In certain implementations, control circuitry 3202, driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a television, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone. In accordance with such an implementation, the link 3252 formed between communication interfaces 3222 and 3230 may be replaced by a direct connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212. In an alternate implementation, control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor. The set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.
  • IV. Conclusion
  • While various embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Thus, the breadth and scope of the present invention should not be limited by any of the above-described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

Claims (28)

1. A method used with three-dimensional viewing content, the three-dimensional viewing content having both a first data portion associated with a first perspective view and a second data portion associated with a second perspective view, the method comprising:
receiving the first data portion that originates from a first source via a first pathway;
receiving the second data portion that originates from a second source via a second pathway; and
causing a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content based on both the first data portion and the second data portion.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
receiving an offer relating to the second data portion; and
carrying out acceptance of the offer;
wherein receiving the second data portion comprises:
receiving the second data portion in response to carrying out the acceptance of the offer.
3. The method of claim 2, further comprising:
delivering an indication relating to the first data portion;
wherein the offer is based at least in part on the indication.
4. The method of claim 2, wherein carrying out the acceptance of the offer triggers a billing event regarding the second data portion.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the first data portion comprising a two-dimensional portion of the three-dimensional viewing content.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein receiving the first data portion comprises:
receiving the first data portion that represents a single perspective view from a storage that is local to a device that causes the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content;
wherein receiving the second data portion comprises:
receiving the second data portion that represents at least one other perspective view; and
wherein causing the visual presentation comprises:
causing the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content that represents at least two perspective views.
7. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
selecting the second data portion based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly that supports the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
8. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
selecting the second data portion based on viewer input.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
initiating a search for the second data in response to a search instruction;
wherein receiving the second data portion comprises:
receiving the second data portion in response to initiating the search.
10. A method used to display first viewing content and second viewing content on a screen assembly, the method comprising:
receiving the first viewing content that originates from a first source via a first pathway;
receiving the second viewing content that originates from a second source via a second pathway;
directing a first configuration of a first region of the screen assembly, the first configuration supporting display of the first viewing content; and
directing a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly, the second configuration supporting display of the second viewing content, and the second configuration being different from the first configuration.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the first pathway comprises a local pathway and the second pathway comprises a remote pathway.
12. The method of claim 10, wherein the second viewing content is unrelated to the first viewing content.
13. The method of claim 10, wherein the first viewing content is two-dimensional content; and
wherein the second viewing content is three-dimensional content.
14. The method of claim 10, wherein the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content that represents a first number of perspectives; and
wherein the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content that represents a second number of perspectives, the second number being different from the first number.
15. Media circuitry that supports three-dimensional viewing content, the three-dimensional viewing content having both a first view portion associated with a first perspective view and a second view portion associated with a second perspective view, the media circuitry comprising:
first circuitry that receives both the first view portion that originates from a first source via a first pathway, and the second view portion that originates from a second source via a second pathway; and
second circuitry that causes a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content based on both the first view portion and the second view portion.
16. The media circuitry of claim 15, wherein the first circuitry receives an offer relating to the second view portion; and
wherein the media circuitry further comprises:
third circuitry that carries out acceptance of the offer.
17. The media circuitry of claim 16, further comprising:
fourth circuitry that delivers an indication relating to the first view portion;
wherein the offer is based on the indication.
18. The media circuitry of claim 16, wherein the third circuitry triggers a billing event regarding the second view portion based at least in part on acceptance of the offer.
19. The media circuitry of claim 15, wherein the first view portion represents a single perspective view of the three-dimensional viewing content.
20. The media circuitry of claim 19, wherein the first circuitry receives the first view portion from a storage that is local to a device that includes the media circuitry; and
wherein the three-dimensional viewing content represents at least two perspective views.
21. The media circuitry of claim 15, further comprising:
third circuitry that selects the second view portion based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly on which the second circuitry causes the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
22. The media circuitry of claim 15, wherein the first circuitry receives a control signal that is generated in response to viewer input; and
wherein the media circuitry further comprises:
third circuitry that selects the second view portion based on the control signal.
23. The media circuitry of claim 15, further comprising:
third circuitry that initiates a search for the second data in response to a search instruction;
wherein the first circuitry receives the second data portion in response to initiation of the search.
24. A media system that supports display of first content and second content on a screen assembly, the media system comprising:
first circuitry that receives both the first content that originates from a first source via a first pathway, and the second content that originates from a second source via a second pathway;
second circuitry that directs a first configuration of a first region of the screen assembly, the first configuration supporting display of the first content; and
the second circuitry directs a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly, the second configuration supporting display of the second content, and the second configuration being different from the first configuration.
25. The media system of claim 24, wherein the first pathway comprises a local pathway and the second pathway comprises a remote pathway.
26. The media system of claim 24, wherein the second viewing content is unrelated to the first viewing content.
27. The media system of claim 24, wherein the first viewing content is two-dimensional content; and
wherein the second viewing content is three-dimensional content.
28. The media system of claim 24, wherein the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content that represents a first number of perspectives; and
wherein the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content that represents a second number of perspectives, the second number being different from the first number.
US12/982,330 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/982,330 US20110157326A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery
US13/220,601 US8897377B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2011-08-29 Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery
US13/285,861 US20120047535A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2011-10-31 Streaming transcoder with adaptive upstream & downstream transcode coordination
US13/285,779 US20120044987A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2011-10-31 Entropy coder supporting selective employment of syntax and context adaptation
US13/285,644 US9406252B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2011-10-31 Adaptive multi-standard video coder supporting adaptive standard selection and mid-stream switch-over
US14/551,216 US9351010B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-11-24 Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US29181809P 2009-12-31 2009-12-31
US30311910P 2010-02-10 2010-02-10
US12/982,330 US20110157326A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/982,199 Continuation-In-Part US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US13/220,601 Continuation-In-Part US8897377B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2011-08-29 Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20110157326A1 true US20110157326A1 (en) 2011-06-30

Family

ID=43797724

Family Applications (27)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Display with elastic light manipulator
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Interpolation of three-dimensional video content
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 2d/3d projection system
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-01 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-06 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-05-28 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support

Family Applications Before (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Display with elastic light manipulator
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking

Family Applications After (14)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Interpolation of three-dimensional video content
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 2d/3d projection system
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-01 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-06 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-05-28 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (27) US8964013B2 (en)
EP (4) EP2357508A1 (en)
CN (3) CN102183840A (en)
HK (1) HK1161754A1 (en)
TW (3) TWI467234B (en)

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110164188A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US20110164115A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US20120249872A1 (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-10-04 Sony Corporation Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method
US20130009921A1 (en) * 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Sony Corporation Display control device, display control method, and computer program
US20140036044A1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-02-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US20150042557A1 (en) * 2012-03-07 2015-02-12 Sony Corporation Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
TWI510813B (en) * 2013-06-18 2015-12-01 Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US20160237030A1 (en) * 2013-10-12 2016-08-18 Zhejiang Hisun Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Synthetic intermediate of maxacalcitol, preparation method therefor and use thereof
US20170148488A1 (en) * 2015-11-20 2017-05-25 Mediatek Inc. Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data
US10802324B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-10-13 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Double vision display method and device
CN113383540A (en) * 2019-01-23 2021-09-10 奥崔迪合作公司 Interoperable 3D image content processing
CN113453939A (en) * 2019-02-12 2021-09-28 株式会社日本显示器 Display device

Families Citing this family (501)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8416217B1 (en) 2002-11-04 2013-04-09 Neonode Inc. Light-based finger gesture user interface
US9015736B2 (en) * 2005-12-29 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for episode tracking in an interactive media environment
PL2023812T3 (en) 2006-05-19 2017-07-31 The Queen's Medical Center Motion tracking system for real time adaptive imaging and spectroscopy
FR2906899B1 (en) * 2006-10-05 2009-01-16 Essilor Int DISPLAY DEVICE FOR STEREOSCOPIC VISUALIZATION.
JP2008106185A (en) * 2006-10-27 2008-05-08 Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd Method for adhering thermally conductive silicone composition, primer for adhesion of thermally conductive silicone composition and method for production of adhesion composite of thermally conductive silicone composition
US8570423B2 (en) * 2009-01-28 2013-10-29 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Systems for performing visual collaboration between remotely situated participants
US8775023B2 (en) 2009-02-15 2014-07-08 Neanode Inc. Light-based touch controls on a steering wheel and dashboard
EP2256620A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-01 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Picture selection method for modular lighting system
US8125418B2 (en) * 2009-06-26 2012-02-28 Global Oled Technology Llc Passive-matrix chiplet drivers for displays
WO2011021894A2 (en) * 2009-08-20 2011-02-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display apparatus and method for operating the same
JP5187639B2 (en) * 2009-08-28 2013-04-24 独立行政法人情報通信研究機構 3D display
US20110080472A1 (en) * 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 Eric Gagneraud Autostereoscopic status display
CA2776909A1 (en) * 2009-10-07 2011-04-14 Telewatch Inc. Video analytics method and system
US8947503B2 (en) * 2009-12-08 2015-02-03 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for processing 3-D video
US20110143769A1 (en) * 2009-12-16 2011-06-16 Microsoft Corporation Dual display mobile communication device
AU2010335972B2 (en) 2009-12-21 2013-10-03 13079023 Canada Association Systems and methods for accessing and controlling media stored remotely
US8684531B2 (en) * 2009-12-28 2014-04-01 Vision3D Technologies, Llc Stereoscopic display device projecting parallax image and adjusting amount of parallax
US20110187839A1 (en) * 2010-02-01 2011-08-04 VIZIO Inc. Frame based three-dimensional encoding method
US20110191328A1 (en) * 2010-02-03 2011-08-04 Vernon Todd H System and method for extracting representative media content from an online document
US20110202845A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-18 Anthony Jon Mountjoy System and method for generating and distributing three dimensional interactive content
JP2011199853A (en) * 2010-02-23 2011-10-06 Panasonic Corp Three-dimensional image reproducing apparatus
DE102010009737A1 (en) * 2010-03-01 2011-09-01 Institut für Rundfunktechnik GmbH Method and arrangement for reproducing 3D image content
JP5462672B2 (en) * 2010-03-16 2014-04-02 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
US8634873B2 (en) * 2010-03-17 2014-01-21 Microsoft Corporation Mobile communication device having multiple, interchangeable second devices
KR101289269B1 (en) * 2010-03-23 2013-07-24 한국전자통신연구원 An apparatus and method for displaying image data in image system
KR20110109565A (en) * 2010-03-31 2011-10-06 삼성전자주식회사 Backlight unit, 3d display having the same and method of making 3d image
US10448083B2 (en) * 2010-04-06 2019-10-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Streaming and rendering of 3-dimensional video
KR20110115806A (en) * 2010-04-16 2011-10-24 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and 3d glasses, and display system including the same
WO2011132422A1 (en) * 2010-04-21 2011-10-27 パナソニック株式会社 Three-dimensional video display device and three-dimensional video display method
US8667533B2 (en) * 2010-04-22 2014-03-04 Microsoft Corporation Customizing streaming content presentation
US9271052B2 (en) 2010-05-10 2016-02-23 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Grid encoded media asset data
US9030536B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for presenting media content
JP5510097B2 (en) * 2010-06-16 2014-06-04 ソニー株式会社 Signal transmission method, signal transmission device, and signal reception device
US10089937B2 (en) * 2010-06-21 2018-10-02 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Spatial and temporal multiplexing display
US9225975B2 (en) 2010-06-21 2015-12-29 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Optimization of a multi-view display
KR20110139497A (en) * 2010-06-23 2011-12-29 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and method for displaying thereof
JP2012013980A (en) * 2010-07-01 2012-01-19 Sony Corp Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit
US9049426B2 (en) * 2010-07-07 2015-06-02 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for distributing three dimensional media content
US8670070B2 (en) * 2010-07-15 2014-03-11 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for achieving better picture quality in various zoom modes
US9232274B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2016-01-05 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content to a requesting device
US9032470B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content according to a position of a viewing apparatus
JP2012034138A (en) * 2010-07-29 2012-02-16 Toshiba Corp Signal processing apparatus and signal processing method
KR20120020627A (en) * 2010-08-30 2012-03-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for image processing using 3d image format
WO2012028678A2 (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-08 Seereal Technologies S.A. Backplane device
JP5058316B2 (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-10-24 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, image processing method, and image processing program
US20120057007A1 (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-03-08 Satoshi Ishiguro Simplified Visual Screening Check on Television
JP5364666B2 (en) * 2010-09-13 2013-12-11 株式会社東芝 Stereoscopic image display apparatus, method and program
JP5368399B2 (en) * 2010-09-17 2013-12-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Electronic album generating apparatus, stereoscopic image pasting apparatus, operation control method thereof, and program thereof
EP2432218B1 (en) * 2010-09-20 2016-04-20 EchoStar Technologies L.L.C. Methods of displaying an electronic program guide
US9309556B2 (en) 2010-09-24 2016-04-12 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Direct capture, amplification and sequencing of target DNA using immobilized primers
US20130201417A1 (en) * 2010-10-13 2013-08-08 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
KR20120046937A (en) * 2010-11-03 2012-05-11 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for providing 3d effect in video device
US9860490B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2018-01-02 Tom Galvin Network video recorder system
US10477158B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2019-11-12 Razberi Technologies, Inc. System and method for a security system
US8922658B2 (en) * 2010-11-05 2014-12-30 Tom Galvin Network video recorder system
KR101670927B1 (en) * 2010-11-05 2016-11-01 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and method
US10157526B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2018-12-18 Razberi Technologies, Inc. System and method for a security system
US11082665B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2021-08-03 Razberi Secure Technologies, Llc System and method for a security system
US9218115B2 (en) 2010-12-02 2015-12-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Input device and image display apparatus including the same
US9172943B2 (en) * 2010-12-07 2015-10-27 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic modification of video content at a set-top box device
KR20120065774A (en) * 2010-12-13 2012-06-21 삼성전자주식회사 Audio providing apparatus, audio receiver and method for providing audio
KR101734285B1 (en) * 2010-12-14 2017-05-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Video processing apparatus of mobile terminal and method thereof
US8963694B2 (en) * 2010-12-17 2015-02-24 Sony Corporation System and method for remote controlled device selection based on device position data and orientation data of a user
US20120154559A1 (en) * 2010-12-21 2012-06-21 Voss Shane D Generate Media
US9386294B2 (en) * 2011-01-05 2016-07-05 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for 3DTV image adjustment
US20120178380A1 (en) * 2011-01-07 2012-07-12 Microsoft Corporation Wireless Communication Techniques
US8643684B2 (en) * 2011-01-18 2014-02-04 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Multi-layer plenoptic displays that combine multiple emissive and light modulating planes
TW201232280A (en) * 2011-01-20 2012-08-01 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd System and method for sharing desktop information
KR20120088467A (en) * 2011-01-31 2012-08-08 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for displaying partial 3d image in 2d image disaply area
JP5632764B2 (en) * 2011-02-02 2014-11-26 セイコーインスツル株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device
US20120202187A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Shadowbox Comics, Llc Method for distribution and display of sequential graphic art
US8724467B2 (en) 2011-02-04 2014-05-13 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for managing congestion in a network environment
US10083639B2 (en) * 2011-02-04 2018-09-25 Seiko Epson Corporation Control device for controlling image display device, head-mounted display device, image display system, control method for the image display device, and control method for the head-mounted display device
TWI569041B (en) 2011-02-14 2017-02-01 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 Display device
US8630247B2 (en) * 2011-02-15 2014-01-14 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for managing tracking area identity lists in a mobile network environment
WO2012111427A1 (en) 2011-02-16 2012-08-23 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9035860B2 (en) 2011-02-16 2015-05-19 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9443455B2 (en) 2011-02-25 2016-09-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device having a plurality of pixels
KR101852428B1 (en) * 2011-03-09 2018-04-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile twrminal and 3d object control method thereof
JP5912680B2 (en) 2011-03-11 2016-04-27 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device and driving method of display device
US9578299B2 (en) 2011-03-14 2017-02-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Stereoscopic conversion for shader based graphics content
JP5766479B2 (en) * 2011-03-25 2015-08-19 京セラ株式会社 Electronic device, control method, and control program
JP5730091B2 (en) * 2011-03-25 2015-06-03 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display panel, display device and electronic device
JP5092033B2 (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-12-05 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, display control method, and display control program
WO2012138539A2 (en) * 2011-04-08 2012-10-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Interactive system for collecting, displaying, and ranking items based on quantitative and textual input from multiple participants
US8988512B2 (en) * 2011-04-14 2015-03-24 Mediatek Inc. Method for adjusting playback of multimedia content according to detection result of user status and related apparatus thereof
JP5161999B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, display control method, and display control program
JP5162000B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
JP5161998B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
WO2012150940A1 (en) * 2011-05-05 2012-11-08 Empire Technology Development Llc Lenticular directional display
US20120287115A1 (en) * 2011-05-10 2012-11-15 Ding Junjie Method for generating image frames
KR20120126458A (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-11-21 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for processing broadcasting signal and display device thereof
WO2012156778A1 (en) * 2011-05-13 2012-11-22 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Adjusting parallax barriers
US8913104B2 (en) * 2011-05-24 2014-12-16 Bose Corporation Audio synchronization for two dimensional and three dimensional video signals
US9420259B2 (en) 2011-05-24 2016-08-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Dynamic distribution of three-dimensional content
JP6050941B2 (en) * 2011-05-26 2016-12-21 サターン ライセンシング エルエルシーSaturn Licensing LLC Display device and method, and program
US9442562B2 (en) * 2011-05-27 2016-09-13 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Systems and methods of image processing that adjust for viewer position, screen size and viewing distance
US9084068B2 (en) * 2011-05-30 2015-07-14 Sony Corporation Sensor-based placement of sound in video recording
WO2012164920A1 (en) * 2011-06-01 2012-12-06 パナソニック株式会社 Video processing device, transmission device, video processing system, video processing method, transmission method, computer program and integrated circuit
JP2012253543A (en) * 2011-06-02 2012-12-20 Seiko Epson Corp Display device, control method of display device, and program
JP5770018B2 (en) * 2011-06-03 2015-08-26 任天堂株式会社 Display control program, display control apparatus, display control method, and display control system
US9363504B2 (en) * 2011-06-23 2016-06-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for displaying 3-dimensional image
US9445046B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2016-09-13 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for presenting media content with telepresence
US9030522B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for providing media content
EP2724541B1 (en) * 2011-06-24 2017-11-29 Thomson Licensing DTV Method and device for delivering 3d content
US9602766B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2017-03-21 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for presenting three dimensional objects with telepresence
KR101772458B1 (en) * 2011-06-28 2017-08-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Display device and method for controlling thereof
US20130265300A1 (en) * 2011-07-03 2013-10-10 Neorai Vardi Computer device in form of wearable glasses and user interface thereof
US8988411B2 (en) 2011-07-08 2015-03-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9137522B2 (en) * 2011-07-11 2015-09-15 Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Device and method for 3-D display control
US9294752B2 (en) * 2011-07-13 2016-03-22 Google Technology Holdings LLC Dual mode user interface system and method for 3D video
US8587635B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-11-19 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for providing media services with telepresence
KR101925495B1 (en) 2011-07-15 2018-12-05 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device and method for driving the display device
KR101926477B1 (en) * 2011-07-18 2018-12-11 삼성전자 주식회사 Contents play method and apparatus
KR20130010834A (en) * 2011-07-19 2013-01-29 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device
JP2013038454A (en) * 2011-08-03 2013-02-21 Sony Corp Image processor, method, and program
JP2013038504A (en) 2011-08-04 2013-02-21 Sony Corp Imaging device, image processing method and program
JP5815326B2 (en) * 2011-08-12 2015-11-17 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Video decoding device and image display device
CA2845730A1 (en) * 2011-08-18 2013-02-21 Utherverse Digital, Inc. Systems and methods of virtual world interaction
US10659724B2 (en) * 2011-08-24 2020-05-19 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for providing dropped picture image processing
WO2013032933A2 (en) 2011-08-26 2013-03-07 Kinecticor, Inc. Methods, systems, and devices for intra-scan motion correction
US20130050596A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-02-28 Industrial Technology Research Institute Auto-stereoscopic display and method for fabricating the same
JP2013050538A (en) 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Sony Corp Display device and electronic apparatus
JP2013050537A (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Sony Corp Display device and electronic apparatus
JP2013050539A (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Sony Corp Display device and electronic apparatus
CN103891275B (en) * 2011-08-31 2017-02-15 Lg电子株式会社 digital broadcast signal processing method and device
US8872813B2 (en) 2011-09-02 2014-10-28 Adobe Systems Incorporated Parallax image authoring and viewing in digital media
CN102368244B (en) * 2011-09-08 2013-05-15 广州市动景计算机科技有限公司 Page content alignment method, device and mobile terminal browser
WO2013043661A1 (en) 2011-09-21 2013-03-28 Magna Electronics, Inc. Vehicle vision system using image data transmission and power supply via a coaxial cable
CN102510503B (en) * 2011-09-30 2015-06-03 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 Stereoscopic display method and stereoscopic display equipment
JP5715539B2 (en) * 2011-10-06 2015-05-07 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
KR20130037861A (en) * 2011-10-07 2013-04-17 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
KR101813035B1 (en) * 2011-10-10 2017-12-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
US20140237536A1 (en) * 2011-10-13 2014-08-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of displaying contents, method of synchronizing contents, and method and device for displaying broadcast contents
GB2495725B (en) * 2011-10-18 2014-10-01 Sony Comp Entertainment Europe Image transfer apparatus and method
JP5149435B1 (en) * 2011-11-04 2013-02-20 株式会社東芝 Video processing apparatus and video processing method
US8933935B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2015-01-13 7D Surgical Inc. Method of rendering and manipulating anatomical images on mobile computing device
KR101887058B1 (en) * 2011-11-11 2018-08-09 엘지전자 주식회사 A process for processing a three-dimensional image and a method for controlling electric power of the same
US20140327708A1 (en) * 2011-11-15 2014-11-06 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
US20130127841A1 (en) * 2011-11-18 2013-05-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional (3d) image display method and apparatus for 3d imaging and displaying contents according to start or end of operation
US9942580B2 (en) 2011-11-18 2018-04-10 At&T Intellecutal Property I, L.P. System and method for automatically selecting encoding/decoding for streaming media
US8660362B2 (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-02-25 Microsoft Corporation Combined depth filtering and super resolution
US10071687B2 (en) 2011-11-28 2018-09-11 Magna Electronics Inc. Vision system for vehicle
DE102011055967B4 (en) * 2011-12-02 2016-03-10 Seereal Technologies S.A. Measuring method and device for carrying out the measuring method
US9626798B2 (en) 2011-12-05 2017-04-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method to digitally replace objects in images or video
CN103163650A (en) * 2011-12-08 2013-06-19 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Naked eye three-dimensional (3D) grating structure
US20130156090A1 (en) * 2011-12-14 2013-06-20 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for enabling multiuser use
US9042266B2 (en) * 2011-12-21 2015-05-26 Kik Interactive, Inc. Methods and apparatus for initializing a network connection for an output device
WO2013091556A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2013-06-27 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Browser based application program extension method and device
EP2611176A3 (en) * 2011-12-29 2015-11-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and controlling method thereof
US9392251B2 (en) 2011-12-29 2016-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, glasses apparatus and method for controlling depth
CN202995143U (en) * 2011-12-29 2013-06-12 三星电子株式会社 Glasses device and display device
TWI467235B (en) * 2012-02-06 2015-01-01 Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd Three-dimensional (3d) display and displaying method thereof
US11282287B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2022-03-22 Matterport, Inc. Employing three-dimensional (3D) data predicted from two-dimensional (2D) images using neural networks for 3D modeling applications and other applications
US9324190B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2016-04-26 Matterport, Inc. Capturing and aligning three-dimensional scenes
US10848731B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2020-11-24 Matterport, Inc. Capturing and aligning panoramic image and depth data
CN103294453B (en) * 2012-02-24 2017-02-22 华为技术有限公司 Image processing method and image processing device
KR20130098023A (en) * 2012-02-27 2013-09-04 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for displaying an image on 3-dimentional display based on multi-layer parallax barrier
JP5942477B2 (en) 2012-02-29 2016-06-29 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Setting device and program
EP2637416A1 (en) * 2012-03-06 2013-09-11 Alcatel Lucent A system and method for optimized streaming of variable multi-viewpoint media
JP5762998B2 (en) * 2012-03-07 2015-08-12 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
JP5806150B2 (en) * 2012-03-13 2015-11-10 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device
JP5779124B2 (en) * 2012-03-13 2015-09-16 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
BR112014001749B1 (en) 2012-03-16 2022-08-16 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited OFFLINE DOWNLOAD METHOD AND SYSTEM
US9280042B2 (en) * 2012-03-16 2016-03-08 City University Of Hong Kong Automatic switching of a multi-mode projector display screen for displaying three-dimensional and two-dimensional images
CN102650741B (en) * 2012-03-16 2014-06-11 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Light splitting device, manufacturing method thereof and 3D (Three-Dimensional) display device
US9733707B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2017-08-15 Honeywell International Inc. Touch screen display user interface and method for improving touch interface utility on the same employing a rules-based masking system
US20130265297A1 (en) * 2012-04-06 2013-10-10 Motorola Mobility, Inc. Display of a Corrected Browser Projection of a Visual Guide for Placing a Three Dimensional Object in a Browser
US9308439B2 (en) * 2012-04-10 2016-04-12 Bally Gaming, Inc. Controlling three-dimensional presentation of wagering game content
CN104205823B (en) * 2012-04-12 2017-03-08 索尼移动通讯有限公司 Improved 3D rendering display system
KR101923150B1 (en) * 2012-04-16 2018-11-29 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
CN102645959A (en) * 2012-04-16 2012-08-22 上海颖杰计算机系统设备有限公司 3D (Three Dimensional) integrated computer
WO2013158322A1 (en) * 2012-04-18 2013-10-24 The Regents Of The University Of California Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display
EP2653906B1 (en) 2012-04-20 2022-08-24 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation A system for delivering stereoscopic images
US9201495B2 (en) * 2012-04-24 2015-12-01 Mobitv, Inc. Control of perspective in multi-dimensional media
CN103379362B (en) * 2012-04-24 2017-07-07 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 VOD method and system
US9707892B2 (en) * 2012-04-25 2017-07-18 Gentex Corporation Multi-focus optical system
US20130290867A1 (en) * 2012-04-27 2013-10-31 Litera Technologies, LLC Systems and Methods For Providing Dynamic and Interactive Viewing and Control of Applications
KR20130123599A (en) * 2012-05-03 2013-11-13 한국과학기술원 Speed dependent automatic dimming technique
CN103457960B (en) 2012-05-15 2018-03-09 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 The method and system of load document in web game
US10089537B2 (en) 2012-05-18 2018-10-02 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle vision system with front and rear camera integration
CN104365093B (en) * 2012-06-01 2017-09-22 皇家飞利浦有限公司 Auto-stereoscopic display device and driving method
US9201270B2 (en) * 2012-06-01 2015-12-01 Leia Inc. Directional backlight with a modulation layer
US8570651B1 (en) * 2012-06-04 2013-10-29 Hae-Yong Choi Both side screen for combined use of 2D/3D images
US9367959B2 (en) * 2012-06-05 2016-06-14 Apple Inc. Mapping application with 3D presentation
US9052197B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-06-09 Apple Inc. Providing navigation instructions while device is in locked mode
US9111380B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-08-18 Apple Inc. Rendering maps
US9418672B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2016-08-16 Apple Inc. Navigation application with adaptive instruction text
US9230556B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2016-01-05 Apple Inc. Voice instructions during navigation
US9886794B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2018-02-06 Apple Inc. Problem reporting in maps
US9159153B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-10-13 Apple Inc. Method, system and apparatus for providing visual feedback of a map view change
US9997069B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2018-06-12 Apple Inc. Context-aware voice guidance
US9482296B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2016-11-01 Apple Inc. Rendering road signs during navigation
US10176633B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2019-01-08 Apple Inc. Integrated mapping and navigation application
JP6046923B2 (en) * 2012-06-07 2016-12-21 キヤノン株式会社 Image coding apparatus, image coding method, and program
US9773338B2 (en) * 2012-06-08 2017-09-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Rendering method of 3D web-page and terminal using the same
US9800862B2 (en) * 2012-06-12 2017-10-24 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois System and methods for visualizing information
US9829996B2 (en) * 2012-06-25 2017-11-28 Zspace, Inc. Operations in a three dimensional display system
CN104321730B (en) * 2012-06-30 2019-02-19 英特尔公司 3D graphical user interface
US9674501B2 (en) * 2012-07-06 2017-06-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Terminal for increasing visual comfort sensation of 3D object and control method thereof
US20140022241A1 (en) * 2012-07-18 2014-01-23 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Display apparatus and method based on symmetrically spb
US10353718B2 (en) * 2012-07-23 2019-07-16 Vmware, Inc. Providing access to a remote application via a web client
US8959176B2 (en) 2012-07-31 2015-02-17 Apple Inc. Streaming common media content to multiple devices
US9491784B2 (en) * 2012-07-31 2016-11-08 Apple Inc. Streaming common media content to multiple devices
CA2822217A1 (en) 2012-08-02 2014-02-02 Iwatchlife Inc. Method and system for anonymous video analytics processing
US9786281B1 (en) * 2012-08-02 2017-10-10 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Household agent learning
US9423871B2 (en) * 2012-08-07 2016-08-23 Honeywell International Inc. System and method for reducing the effects of inadvertent touch on a touch screen controller
KR101994295B1 (en) * 2012-08-08 2019-06-28 삼성전자주식회사 Terminal and method for generating live image in terminal
US9225972B2 (en) 2012-08-10 2015-12-29 Pixtronix, Inc. Three dimensional (3D) image generation using electromechanical display elements
US9198209B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2015-11-24 Cisco Technology, Inc. Providing integrated end-to-end architecture that includes quality of service transport for tunneled traffic
TWI509289B (en) * 2012-08-27 2015-11-21 Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd Stereoscopic display apparatus and image display method thereof
CN103631021B (en) * 2012-08-27 2016-06-15 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 3 d display device and image display method thereof
KR20140028780A (en) * 2012-08-30 2014-03-10 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
US9811878B1 (en) * 2012-09-04 2017-11-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Dynamic processing of image borders
US10171540B2 (en) * 2012-09-07 2019-01-01 High Sec Labs Ltd Method and apparatus for streaming video security
WO2014041672A1 (en) * 2012-09-14 2014-03-20 日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社 Video display device and terminal device
US9179232B2 (en) * 2012-09-17 2015-11-03 Nokia Technologies Oy Method and apparatus for associating audio objects with content and geo-location
JP5837009B2 (en) * 2012-09-26 2015-12-24 キヤノン株式会社 Display device and control method thereof
CN104104934B (en) * 2012-10-04 2019-02-19 陈笛 The component and method of the more spectators' Three-dimensional Displays of glasses-free
JP5928286B2 (en) * 2012-10-05 2016-06-01 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information processing apparatus and program
MX2015004575A (en) * 2012-10-10 2016-07-06 Broadcast 3Dtv Inc System for distributing auto-stereoscopic images.
US20140104242A1 (en) * 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Nvidia Corporation System and method for concurrent display of a video signal on a plurality of display devices
US9235103B2 (en) * 2012-10-25 2016-01-12 Au Optronics Corporation 3D liquid crystal display comprising four electrodes alternately arrange between a first and second substrate
CN102917265A (en) * 2012-10-25 2013-02-06 深圳创维-Rgb电子有限公司 Information browsing method and system based on network television
TWI452345B (en) * 2012-10-26 2014-09-11 Au Optronics Corp Three dimensions display device and displaying method thereof
US9161018B2 (en) * 2012-10-26 2015-10-13 Christopher L. UHL Methods and systems for synthesizing stereoscopic images
JP2014092744A (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-19 Japan Display Inc Stereoscopic display device
US9674510B2 (en) * 2012-11-21 2017-06-06 Elwha Llc Pulsed projection system for 3D video
CN102981343B (en) * 2012-11-21 2015-01-07 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, as well as two-dimensional and three-dimensional display surface substrate and display device
CN104516168B (en) * 2012-11-21 2018-05-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, 2 d-3 d display base plate and display device
US9547937B2 (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-01-17 Legend3D, Inc. Three-dimensional annotation system and method
WO2014085910A1 (en) 2012-12-04 2014-06-12 Interaxon Inc. System and method for enhancing content using brain-state data
US9265458B2 (en) 2012-12-04 2016-02-23 Sync-Think, Inc. Application of smooth pursuit cognitive testing paradigms to clinical drug development
US9128580B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2015-09-08 Honeywell International Inc. System and method for interacting with a touch screen interface utilizing an intelligent stencil mask
US20140165209A1 (en) * 2012-12-11 2014-06-12 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Digital content delivery platform for multiple retailers
US9047054B1 (en) 2012-12-20 2015-06-02 Audible, Inc. User location-based management of content presentation
US9497448B2 (en) * 2012-12-31 2016-11-15 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof
TWI531213B (en) * 2013-01-18 2016-04-21 國立成功大學 Image conversion method and module for naked-eye 3d display
US10327708B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2019-06-25 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
US9305365B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2016-04-05 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking moving targets
US9717461B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2017-08-01 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
US9782141B2 (en) 2013-02-01 2017-10-10 Kineticor, Inc. Motion tracking system for real time adaptive motion compensation in biomedical imaging
JP6145721B2 (en) * 2013-02-19 2017-06-14 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Image display device
TWI502247B (en) * 2013-02-26 2015-10-01 Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd Autostereoscopic display device and display method thereof
US8712217B1 (en) 2013-03-01 2014-04-29 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Methods and systems for time-shifting content
US9380976B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2016-07-05 Sync-Think, Inc. Optical neuroinformatics
US20140267601A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Corel Corporation System and method for efficient editing of 3d video
US20140268324A1 (en) * 2013-03-18 2014-09-18 3-D Virtual Lens Technologies, Llc Method of displaying 3d images from 2d source images using a barrier grid
CN103236074B (en) * 2013-03-25 2015-12-23 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 A kind of 2D/3D image processing method and device
US10110647B2 (en) * 2013-03-28 2018-10-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for altering bandwidth consumption
KR101981530B1 (en) 2013-03-29 2019-05-23 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic image display device and method for driving the same
CN103235415B (en) * 2013-04-01 2015-12-23 昆山龙腾光电有限公司 Based on the multi-view free stereoscopic displayer of grating
KR101970577B1 (en) * 2013-04-09 2019-04-19 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic display device and eye-tracking method thereof
US20140316907A1 (en) * 2013-04-17 2014-10-23 Asaf NAIM Multilayered user interface for internet browser
US20140328505A1 (en) * 2013-05-02 2014-11-06 Microsoft Corporation Sound field adaptation based upon user tracking
CN103293689B (en) * 2013-05-31 2015-05-13 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Method capable of switching between different display modes and display device
KR20140142863A (en) * 2013-06-05 2014-12-15 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for providing graphic editors
CN104238185B (en) * 2013-06-19 2017-04-12 扬升照明股份有限公司 Light source module, display device and light source module drive method
CN103309639A (en) * 2013-06-21 2013-09-18 广东威创视讯科技股份有限公司 Method and device based on split screen display of three-dimensional scene
WO2014210033A2 (en) 2013-06-24 2014-12-31 The Regents Of The University Of California Practical two-frame 3d+2d tv
CN103365657B (en) * 2013-06-28 2019-03-15 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Display control method, device and the display equipment including the device
TWI495904B (en) * 2013-07-12 2015-08-11 Vision Technology Co Ltd C Field sequential color lcd and method for generating 3d images by matching a software optical grating
US9418469B1 (en) 2013-07-19 2016-08-16 Outward, Inc. Generating video content
JP2015025968A (en) * 2013-07-26 2015-02-05 ソニー株式会社 Presentation medium and display device
US9678929B2 (en) * 2013-08-01 2017-06-13 Equldo Limited Stereoscopic online web content creation and rendering
TWI489148B (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-06-21 Au Optronics Corp Stereoscopic display and the driving method
TWI505243B (en) * 2013-09-10 2015-10-21 Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd A device that can display 2D and 3D images at the same time
KR101856568B1 (en) * 2013-09-16 2018-06-19 삼성전자주식회사 Multi view image display apparatus and controlling method thereof
US10067634B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2018-09-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for three-dimensional object display
US10592064B2 (en) * 2013-09-17 2020-03-17 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for three-dimensional object display used in content navigation
US9392355B1 (en) * 2013-09-19 2016-07-12 Voyetra Turtle Beach, Inc. Gaming headset with voice scrambling for private in-game conversations
US9591295B2 (en) * 2013-09-24 2017-03-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for simulating three-dimensional views
US20160255322A1 (en) * 2013-10-07 2016-09-01 Vid Scale, Inc. User adaptive 3d video rendering and delivery
US9986228B2 (en) 2016-03-24 2018-05-29 3Di Llc Trackable glasses system that provides multiple views of a shared display
US10116914B2 (en) * 2013-10-31 2018-10-30 3Di Llc Stereoscopic display
US9883173B2 (en) 2013-12-25 2018-01-30 3Di Llc Stereoscopic display
US11343487B2 (en) 2013-10-31 2022-05-24 David Woods Trackable glasses system for perspective views of a display
US10652525B2 (en) 2013-10-31 2020-05-12 3Di Llc Quad view display system
JP6411862B2 (en) * 2013-11-15 2018-10-24 パナソニック株式会社 File generation method and file generation apparatus
KR20150057064A (en) * 2013-11-18 2015-05-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Electronic device and control method thereof
US20150138184A1 (en) * 2013-11-20 2015-05-21 Apple Inc. Spatially interactive computing device
TWI511112B (en) * 2013-11-27 2015-12-01 Acer Inc Image display method and display system
CN103605211B (en) * 2013-11-27 2016-04-20 南京大学 Tablet non-auxiliary stereo display device and method
KR20150065056A (en) * 2013-12-04 2015-06-12 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Image display apparatus
US9988047B2 (en) 2013-12-12 2018-06-05 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle control system with traffic driving control
US20150189256A1 (en) * 2013-12-16 2015-07-02 Christian Stroetmann Autostereoscopic multi-layer display and control approaches
CN103676302B (en) * 2013-12-31 2016-04-06 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Realize array base palte, display device and method that 2D/3D display switches
US10409079B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2019-09-10 Avegant Corp. Apparatus, system, and method for displaying an image using a plate
US10303242B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2019-05-28 Avegant Corp. Media chair apparatus, system, and method
JP6467680B2 (en) * 2014-01-10 2019-02-13 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 File generation method and file generation apparatus
WO2015112755A1 (en) * 2014-01-22 2015-07-30 AI Squared Emphasizing a portion of the visible content elements of a markup language document
EP3097689B1 (en) 2014-01-23 2019-12-25 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Multi-view display control for channel selection
US9182605B2 (en) * 2014-01-29 2015-11-10 Emine Goulanian Front-projection autostereoscopic 3D display system
US10453371B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2019-10-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-layer display with color and contrast enhancement
US10375365B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2019-08-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Projection system with enhanced color and contrast
US10554962B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2020-02-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-layer high transparency display for light field generation
US10565925B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2020-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Full color display with intrinsic transparency
CN103792672B (en) * 2014-02-14 2016-03-23 成都京东方光电科技有限公司 Stereo display assembly, liquid crystal panel and display device
CN104853008B (en) * 2014-02-17 2020-05-19 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Portable device and method capable of switching between two-dimensional display and three-dimensional display
KR101678389B1 (en) * 2014-02-28 2016-11-22 엔트릭스 주식회사 Method for providing media data based on cloud computing, apparatus and system
CN103903548B (en) * 2014-03-07 2016-03-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of driving method of display panel and drive system
US9348495B2 (en) 2014-03-07 2016-05-24 Sony Corporation Control of large screen display using wireless portable computer and facilitating selection of audio on a headphone
EP3157422A4 (en) 2014-03-24 2018-01-24 The University of Hawaii Systems, methods, and devices for removing prospective motion correction from medical imaging scans
US9373306B2 (en) * 2014-03-25 2016-06-21 Intel Coporation Direct viewer projection
KR102175813B1 (en) * 2014-04-18 2020-11-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Three dimensional image display device and method of processing image
US20150334367A1 (en) * 2014-05-13 2015-11-19 Nagravision S.A. Techniques for displaying three dimensional objects
KR102204830B1 (en) * 2014-05-20 2021-01-19 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial brordcasting based on non real time service
US9838756B2 (en) * 2014-05-20 2017-12-05 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial broadcasting based on non real time service
CN104023223B (en) * 2014-05-29 2016-03-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display control method, Apparatus and system
CN104090365A (en) * 2014-06-18 2014-10-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Shutter glasses, display device, display system and display method
US10613585B2 (en) * 2014-06-19 2020-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Transparent display apparatus, group play system using transparent display apparatus and performance methods thereof
GB2527548A (en) * 2014-06-25 2015-12-30 Sharp Kk Variable barrier pitch correction
KR102221676B1 (en) 2014-07-02 2021-03-02 삼성전자주식회사 Method, User terminal and Audio System for the speaker location and level control using the magnetic field
CN104155769A (en) * 2014-07-15 2014-11-19 深圳市亿思达显示科技有限公司 2D/3D co-fusion display device and advertizing device
CN104090818A (en) * 2014-07-16 2014-10-08 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Information processing method, device and system
CN104252058B (en) * 2014-07-18 2017-06-20 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Grating control method and device, grating, display panel and 3D display devices
TWI556624B (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-11-01 友達光電股份有限公司 Image displaying method and image dispaly device
WO2016014718A1 (en) 2014-07-23 2016-01-28 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
JP6064084B2 (en) * 2014-07-30 2017-01-18 オリンパス株式会社 Image processing device
WO2016021861A1 (en) * 2014-08-02 2016-02-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Electronic device and user interaction method thereof
KR102366677B1 (en) * 2014-08-02 2022-02-23 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and Method for User Interaction thereof
CN105323654B (en) * 2014-08-05 2019-02-15 优视科技有限公司 The method and apparatus for carrying out the content-data of automatic network is presented
JP6327062B2 (en) * 2014-08-25 2018-05-23 オムロン株式会社 Display device
US9925980B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-03-27 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle collision avoidance system with enhanced pedestrian avoidance
US11205305B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2021-12-21 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Presentation of three-dimensional video
US10750153B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2020-08-18 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Camera system for three-dimensional video
CN107079147B (en) 2014-09-25 2019-08-16 皇家飞利浦有限公司 Display equipment with outbound course control and the backlight for this display equipment
FR3026589A1 (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-04-01 Orange METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADAPTING THE DISPLAY OF A VIDEO STREAM BY A CLIENT
FR3026852B1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2016-12-02 Thales Sa SEMI-TRANSPARENT SCREEN DISPLAY SYSTEM SHARED BY TWO OBSERVERS
US10506295B2 (en) * 2014-10-09 2019-12-10 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Systems and methods for delivering secondary content to viewers
KR102266064B1 (en) * 2014-10-15 2021-06-18 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus
US20160119685A1 (en) * 2014-10-21 2016-04-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display method and display device
CN104361622B (en) * 2014-10-31 2018-06-19 福建星网视易信息系统有限公司 A kind of interface method for drafting and device
DE102014225796A1 (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-16 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Method for controlling a vehicle system
CN104461440B (en) * 2014-12-31 2018-01-02 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 Rendering intent, rendering device and display device
JP6567058B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2019-08-28 レイア、インコーポレイテッドLeia Inc. 2D / 3D (2D / 3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display
EP3243094B1 (en) 2015-01-10 2022-03-23 LEIA Inc. Multibeam grating-based backlight and a method of electronic display operation
WO2016111709A1 (en) 2015-01-10 2016-07-14 Leia Inc. Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency
EP3248058B1 (en) 2015-01-19 2020-05-06 LEIA Inc. Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island
KR20160089600A (en) * 2015-01-19 2016-07-28 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
US9690110B2 (en) * 2015-01-21 2017-06-27 Apple Inc. Fine-coarse autostereoscopic display
ES2951155T3 (en) * 2015-01-28 2023-10-18 Leia Inc Three-dimensional (3D) electronic display
US20160227156A1 (en) * 2015-02-02 2016-08-04 Hisense Hiview Tech Co., Ltd. Modular television system
JP6359989B2 (en) * 2015-02-24 2018-07-18 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and display method
JP6359990B2 (en) * 2015-02-24 2018-07-18 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and display method
TWI554788B (en) * 2015-03-04 2016-10-21 友達光電股份有限公司 Display device
KR102321364B1 (en) * 2015-03-05 2021-11-03 삼성전자주식회사 Method for synthesizing a 3d backgroud content and device thereof
ES2877511T3 (en) 2015-03-16 2021-11-17 Leia Inc Grid-based unidirectional backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer
JP6411257B2 (en) * 2015-03-19 2018-10-24 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and control method thereof
US9823474B2 (en) 2015-04-02 2017-11-21 Avegant Corp. System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image with a wider field of view
US9995857B2 (en) 2015-04-03 2018-06-12 Avegant Corp. System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image using focal modulation
US9846309B2 (en) * 2015-04-17 2017-12-19 Dongseo University Technology Headquarters Depth-priority integral imaging display method using nonuniform dynamic mask array
WO2016171705A1 (en) 2015-04-23 2016-10-27 Leia Inc. Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same
US9705936B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2017-07-11 Mersive Technologies, Inc. System and method for interactive and real-time visualization of distributed media
US10360617B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2019-07-23 Walmart Apollo, Llc Automated shopping apparatus and method in response to consumption
EP3295242B1 (en) 2015-05-09 2020-05-06 LEIA Inc. Colour-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using the same
CN104834104B (en) * 2015-05-25 2017-05-24 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 2D/3D switchable display panel, and display method and display device thereof
WO2016195647A1 (en) 2015-05-30 2016-12-08 Leia Inc. Vehicle monitoring system
US10904091B2 (en) 2015-06-03 2021-01-26 Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited System for network-based reallocation of functions
CN104883559A (en) * 2015-06-06 2015-09-02 深圳市虚拟现实科技有限公司 Video playing method and video playing device
CN104851394B (en) * 2015-06-10 2017-11-28 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of display device and display methods
CN104849870B (en) * 2015-06-12 2018-01-09 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display panel and display device
EP3313065A4 (en) * 2015-06-16 2018-11-14 LG Electronics Inc. Broadcast signal transmission device, broadcast signal reception device, broadcast signal transmission method, and broadcast signal reception method
US9846310B2 (en) * 2015-06-22 2017-12-19 Innolux Corporation 3D image display device with improved depth ranges
GB2540377A (en) 2015-07-14 2017-01-18 Sharp Kk Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions
GB2540376A (en) * 2015-07-14 2017-01-18 Sharp Kk Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions
FR3038995B1 (en) * 2015-07-15 2018-05-11 F4 INTERACTIVE DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY
KR20180030878A (en) 2015-07-17 2018-03-26 에이비엘 아이피 홀딩, 엘엘씨 Software configurable lighting devices
CA2992590A1 (en) 2015-07-17 2017-01-26 Abl Ip Holding Llc Systems and methods to provide configuration data to a software configurable lighting device
WO2017015056A1 (en) * 2015-07-17 2017-01-26 Abl Ip Holding Llc Arrangements for software configurable lighting device
US9943247B2 (en) 2015-07-28 2018-04-17 The University Of Hawai'i Systems, devices, and methods for detecting false movements for motion correction during a medical imaging scan
US10079000B2 (en) 2015-08-12 2018-09-18 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Reducing display degradation
CN105100783B (en) 2015-08-19 2018-03-23 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 3D display device and 3D display method
US10186188B2 (en) * 2015-09-23 2019-01-22 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Multi-angle simultaneous view light-emitting diode display
EP3148188A1 (en) * 2015-09-24 2017-03-29 Airbus Operations GmbH Virtual windows for airborne verhicles
FR3042620B1 (en) 2015-10-16 2017-12-08 F4 INTERACTIVE WEB DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY
CN107566822B (en) * 2015-10-20 2019-03-26 深圳超多维科技有限公司 A kind of method, apparatus and electronic equipment of bore hole stereoscopic display
CN105306866A (en) * 2015-10-27 2016-02-03 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 Frame rate conversion method and device
CN108370439B (en) * 2015-11-10 2020-09-29 皇家飞利浦有限公司 Display apparatus and display control method
EP3374231A4 (en) 2015-11-13 2019-05-29 Harman International Industries, Incorporated User interface for in-vehicle system
WO2017091479A1 (en) 2015-11-23 2017-06-01 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
US10144419B2 (en) 2015-11-23 2018-12-04 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle dynamic control system for emergency handling
US9711128B2 (en) * 2015-12-04 2017-07-18 Opentv, Inc. Combined audio for multiple content presentation
WO2017127396A1 (en) 2016-01-19 2017-07-27 Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Consumable item ordering system
US10373544B1 (en) 2016-01-29 2019-08-06 Leia, Inc. Transformation from tiled to composite images
AU2017211032B2 (en) * 2016-01-29 2021-11-04 Magic Leap, Inc. Display for three-dimensional image
WO2017156622A1 (en) * 2016-03-13 2017-09-21 Rising Sun Productions Limited Head-mounted audiovisual capture device
US10063917B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2018-08-28 Sorenson Media Inc. Fingerprint layouts for content fingerprinting
US10691880B2 (en) * 2016-03-29 2020-06-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Ink in an electronic document
US10200428B1 (en) * 2016-03-30 2019-02-05 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Unicast routing of a media stream to subscribers
US10185787B1 (en) * 2016-04-06 2019-01-22 Bentley Systems, Incorporated Tool for accurate onsite model visualization that facilitates environment interaction
US10256277B2 (en) * 2016-04-11 2019-04-09 Abl Ip Holding Llc Luminaire utilizing a transparent organic light emitting device display
WO2017188955A1 (en) * 2016-04-28 2017-11-02 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Digital display devices
US10353534B2 (en) 2016-05-13 2019-07-16 Sap Se Overview page in multi application user interface
US10579238B2 (en) 2016-05-13 2020-03-03 Sap Se Flexible screen layout across multiple platforms
TWI626475B (en) * 2016-06-08 2018-06-11 國立交通大學 Stereoscopic display screen and stereoscopic display system
US9973874B2 (en) * 2016-06-17 2018-05-15 Dts, Inc. Audio rendering using 6-DOF tracking
CN105842865B (en) * 2016-06-21 2018-01-30 成都工业学院 A kind of slim grating 3D display device based on slit grating
CN106257321B (en) * 2016-06-28 2021-11-30 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 3D head-up display system and method
US10235010B2 (en) 2016-07-28 2019-03-19 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Information processing apparatus configured to generate an audio signal corresponding to a virtual viewpoint image, information processing system, information processing method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium
US20180035236A1 (en) * 2016-07-28 2018-02-01 Leonardo Basterra Audio System with Binaural Elements and Method of Use with Perspective Switching
US10089063B2 (en) 2016-08-10 2018-10-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Multimedia device for processing spatialized audio based on movement
US10154253B2 (en) * 2016-08-29 2018-12-11 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Multi-view displays using images encoded with orbital angular momentum (OAM) on a pixel or image basis
WO2018044711A1 (en) * 2016-08-31 2018-03-08 Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Systems and methods of enabling retail shopping while disabling components based on location
US10271043B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2019-04-23 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface—360-degree visualization of 2D webpage content
US11003305B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2021-05-11 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface
US10127715B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2018-11-13 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface—non-native stereoscopic image conversion
US10621898B2 (en) * 2016-11-23 2020-04-14 Pure Depth Limited Multi-layer display system for vehicle dash or the like
GB2556910A (en) * 2016-11-25 2018-06-13 Nokia Technologies Oy Virtual reality display
US10170060B2 (en) * 2016-12-27 2019-01-01 Facebook Technologies, Llc Interlaced liquid crystal display panel and backlight used in a head mounted display
US10425700B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2019-09-24 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on real-time or near-real-time content context analysis
US11038932B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-15 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. System for establishing a shared media session for one or more client devices
US10856016B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-12-01 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode based on user selection
US10965967B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-03-30 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate per-client live media output stream based on dynamic insertion of targeted non-programming content and customized programming content
US11051061B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream using pre-encoded media assets
US10075753B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2018-09-11 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on user selection
US11503352B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2022-11-15 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on external data
US11051074B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams using live input streams
US11134309B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-09-28 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Creation of channels using pre-encoded media assets
US11109086B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-08-31 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode
US10645462B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-05-05 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain
US10694231B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-06-23 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain based on user preferences
US10992973B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-04-27 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a plurality of disparate live media output stream manifests using live input streams and pre-encoded media assets
CN108287679A (en) * 2017-01-10 2018-07-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of display characteristic parameter adjusting method and terminal
CN106710531B (en) * 2017-01-19 2019-11-05 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 Backlight control circuit and electronic device
US11044464B2 (en) * 2017-02-09 2021-06-22 Fyusion, Inc. Dynamic content modification of image and video based multi-view interactive digital media representations
US10650416B1 (en) * 2017-02-17 2020-05-12 Sprint Communications Company L.P. Live production interface and response testing
US10210833B2 (en) * 2017-03-31 2019-02-19 Panasonic Liquid Crystal Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US10078135B1 (en) * 2017-04-25 2018-09-18 Intel Corporation Identifying a physical distance using audio channels
CA3060435C (en) * 2017-05-14 2021-12-28 Leia Inc. Multiview backlight, display, and method employing active emitter arrays
US10375375B2 (en) 2017-05-15 2019-08-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of providing fixed region information or offset region information for subtitle in virtual reality system and device for controlling the same
FR3066672B1 (en) * 2017-05-19 2020-05-22 Sagemcom Broadband Sas METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AN IMMERSIVE VIDEO
US11245964B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2022-02-08 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Management and delivery of over-the-top services over different content-streaming systems
CA3059984C (en) 2017-05-30 2024-01-30 Magic Leap, Inc. Power supply assembly with fan assembly for electronic device
EP3639136B1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2023-07-19 Microsoft Technology Licensing, LLC Generating user interface containers
CN107146573B (en) * 2017-06-26 2020-05-01 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 Display panel, display method thereof and display device
EP3422151A1 (en) * 2017-06-30 2019-01-02 Nokia Technologies Oy Methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs for enabling consumption of virtual content for mediated reality
US20190026004A1 (en) * 2017-07-18 2019-01-24 Chicago Labs, LLC Three Dimensional Icons for Computer Applications
IL271963B (en) 2017-07-28 2022-08-01 Magic Leap Inc Fan assembly for displaying an image
US10692279B2 (en) * 2017-07-31 2020-06-23 Quantum Spatial, Inc. Systems and methods for facilitating making partial selections of multidimensional information while maintaining a multidimensional structure
CN107396087B (en) * 2017-07-31 2019-03-12 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Naked eye three-dimensional display device and its control method
US11049218B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2021-06-29 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Seamless image stitching
US10515397B2 (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-12-24 Uptown Network LLC System and method for facilitating virtual gift giving
CN107707901B (en) * 2017-09-30 2019-10-25 深圳超多维科技有限公司 It is a kind of for the display methods of naked eye 3D display screen, device and equipment
CN108205411A (en) * 2017-09-30 2018-06-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Display changeover method and device, terminal
US10777057B1 (en) * 2017-11-30 2020-09-15 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Premises security system with audio simulating occupancy
US10212532B1 (en) 2017-12-13 2019-02-19 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Immersive media with media device
EP3503579B1 (en) 2017-12-20 2022-03-23 Nokia Technologies Oy Multi-camera device
US11132842B2 (en) * 2017-12-22 2021-09-28 Unity IPR ApS Method and system for synchronizing a plurality of augmented reality devices to a virtual reality device
JP2019154008A (en) * 2018-03-06 2019-09-12 シャープ株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device, method for displaying liquid crystal display, and program for liquid crystal display
CN108469682A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-08-31 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of three-dimensional display apparatus and its 3 D displaying method
CN108490703B (en) * 2018-04-03 2021-10-15 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display system and display control method thereof
US11025892B1 (en) 2018-04-04 2021-06-01 James Andrew Aman System and method for simultaneously providing public and private images
US10523921B2 (en) * 2018-04-06 2019-12-31 Zspace, Inc. Replacing 2D images with 3D images
US10523922B2 (en) * 2018-04-06 2019-12-31 Zspace, Inc. Identifying replacement 3D images for 2D images via ranking criteria
US10609503B2 (en) 2018-04-08 2020-03-31 Dts, Inc. Ambisonic depth extraction
US11343568B2 (en) * 2018-04-11 2022-05-24 Alcacruz Inc. Digital media system
US10999573B2 (en) * 2018-04-25 2021-05-04 Raxium, Inc. Partial light field display architecture
CN116631356A (en) 2018-04-26 2023-08-22 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device and electronic apparatus
EP3579584A1 (en) 2018-06-07 2019-12-11 Nokia Technologies Oy Controlling rendering of a spatial audio scene
US10600246B2 (en) * 2018-06-15 2020-03-24 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Pinning virtual reality passthrough regions to real-world locations
KR102506873B1 (en) * 2018-07-18 2023-03-08 현대자동차주식회사 Vehicle cluster having a three-dimensional effect, system having the same and method providing a three-dimensional scene thereof
WO2020022288A1 (en) * 2018-07-27 2020-01-30 京セラ株式会社 Display device and mobile body
US10887574B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-01-05 Intel Corporation Selective packing of patches for immersive video
US11212506B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-12-28 Intel Corporation Reduced rendering of six-degree of freedom video
US10893299B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-01-12 Intel Corporation Surface normal vector processing mechanism
US10762394B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2020-09-01 Intel Corporation System and method for 3D blob classification and transmission
US11178373B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-11-16 Intel Corporation Adaptive resolution of point cloud and viewpoint prediction for video streaming in computing environments
US10757324B2 (en) 2018-08-03 2020-08-25 Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc Transform processors for gradually switching between image transforms
US11057631B2 (en) 2018-10-10 2021-07-06 Intel Corporation Point cloud coding standard conformance definition in computing environments
CN109192136B (en) * 2018-10-25 2020-12-22 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display substrate, light field display device and driving method thereof
US11727859B2 (en) 2018-10-25 2023-08-15 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Display panel and display device
KR102023905B1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2019-11-04 전자부품연구원 Electronic device and method for multi-channel reproduction of tiled image
US10880534B2 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-12-29 Korea Electronics Technology Institute Electronic device and method for tiled video multi-channel playback
US10699673B2 (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-06-30 Facebook Technologies, Llc Apparatus, systems, and methods for local dimming in brightness-controlled environments
CN109598254B (en) * 2018-12-17 2019-11-26 海南大学 The space representation combined optimization method of Group-oriented
US11082734B2 (en) 2018-12-21 2021-08-03 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream that complies with distribution format regulations
US10880606B2 (en) 2018-12-21 2020-12-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Disparate live media output stream playout and broadcast distribution
US10873774B2 (en) 2018-12-22 2020-12-22 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream manifest that includes one or more media segments corresponding to key events
CN109725819B (en) * 2018-12-25 2022-12-13 浙江玖炫智能信息技术有限公司 Interface display method and device, double-screen double-system terminal and readable storage medium
US10854171B2 (en) * 2018-12-31 2020-12-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user personal display system and applications thereof
CN109686303B (en) * 2019-01-28 2021-09-17 厦门天马微电子有限公司 Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device and compensation method
US10932080B2 (en) 2019-02-14 2021-02-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Multi-sensor object tracking for modifying audio
CN110007475A (en) * 2019-04-17 2019-07-12 万维云视(上海)数码科技有限公司 Utilize the method and apparatus of virtual depth compensation eyesight
US10964275B2 (en) 2019-04-18 2021-03-30 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing
US10571744B1 (en) 2019-04-18 2020-02-25 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and power consumption compensation
US10504453B1 (en) 2019-04-18 2019-12-10 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units
EP3938884A4 (en) * 2019-04-29 2022-11-09 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Wireless configuration of display attribute
CN110262051B (en) * 2019-07-26 2023-12-29 成都工业学院 Retroreflective stereoscopic display device based on directional light source
EP3779612A1 (en) * 2019-08-16 2021-02-17 The Swatch Group Research and Development Ltd Method for broadcasting a message to the wearer of a watch
CN112394845B (en) * 2019-08-19 2024-03-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Distance sensor module, display device, electronic equipment and distance detection method
US11335095B1 (en) * 2019-08-27 2022-05-17 Gopro, Inc. Systems and methods for characterizing visual content
CN114730081A (en) * 2019-09-03 2022-07-08 光场实验室公司 Light field display system for gaming environments
CN111415629B (en) * 2020-04-28 2022-02-22 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 Display device driving method and display device
US11750795B2 (en) 2020-05-12 2023-09-05 Apple Inc. Displays with viewer tracking
US11936844B1 (en) 2020-08-11 2024-03-19 Apple Inc. Pre-processing in a display pipeline
CN112505942B (en) * 2021-02-03 2021-04-20 成都工业学院 Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source
CN113992885B (en) * 2021-09-22 2023-03-21 联想(北京)有限公司 Data synchronization method and device
NL2030325B1 (en) * 2021-12-28 2023-07-03 Dimenco Holding B V Scaling of three-dimensional content for an autostereoscopic display device
KR20230112485A (en) * 2022-01-20 2023-07-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Display device and operating method thereof
CN114936002A (en) * 2022-06-10 2022-08-23 斑马网络技术有限公司 Interface display method and device and vehicle

Citations (109)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4829365A (en) * 1986-03-07 1989-05-09 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask
US5493427A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-02-20 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens
US5615046A (en) * 1995-01-23 1997-03-25 Cyber Scientific Inc. Stereoscopic viewing system
US5855425A (en) * 1996-07-19 1999-01-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Stereoscopic display
US5945965A (en) * 1995-06-29 1999-08-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method
US5959597A (en) * 1995-09-28 1999-09-28 Sony Corporation Image/audio reproducing system
US5969850A (en) * 1996-09-27 1999-10-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source
US5990975A (en) * 1996-11-22 1999-11-23 Acer Peripherals, Inc. Dual screen displaying device
US6023277A (en) * 1996-07-03 2000-02-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display control apparatus and method
US6049424A (en) * 1995-11-15 2000-04-11 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display device
US6094216A (en) * 1995-05-22 2000-07-25 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method
US6144375A (en) * 1998-08-14 2000-11-07 Praja Inc. Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity
US6188442B1 (en) * 1997-08-01 2001-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Multiviewer display system for television monitors
US6285368B1 (en) * 1997-02-10 2001-09-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system
US20020010798A1 (en) * 2000-04-20 2002-01-24 Israel Ben-Shaul Differentiated content and application delivery via internet
US20020037037A1 (en) * 2000-09-22 2002-03-28 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability
US20020167862A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-11-14 Carlo Tomasi Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device
US20020171666A1 (en) * 1999-02-19 2002-11-21 Takaaki Endo Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point
US20030012425A1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2003-01-16 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system
US20030103165A1 (en) * 2000-05-19 2003-06-05 Werner Bullinger System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance
US20030137506A1 (en) * 2001-11-30 2003-07-24 Daniel Efran Image-based rendering for 3D viewing
US20030154261A1 (en) * 1994-10-17 2003-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US20030223499A1 (en) * 2002-04-09 2003-12-04 Nicholas Routhier Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences
US20040027452A1 (en) * 2002-08-07 2004-02-12 Yun Kug Jin Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture
US6697687B1 (en) * 1998-11-09 2004-02-24 Hitachi, Ltd. Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type
US20040036763A1 (en) * 1994-11-14 2004-02-26 Swift David C. Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments
US20040041747A1 (en) * 2002-08-27 2004-03-04 Nec Corporation 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device
US6710920B1 (en) * 1998-03-27 2004-03-23 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd Stereoscopic display
US20040109093A1 (en) * 2002-12-05 2004-06-10 Small-Stryker Aaron Tug Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts
US20040141237A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2004-07-22 Wohlstadter Jacob N. Three dimensional imaging system
US20040164292A1 (en) * 2003-02-21 2004-08-26 Yeh-Jiun Tung Transflective display having an OLED backlight
US20040239231A1 (en) * 2002-10-30 2004-12-02 Keisuke Miyagawa Display device and electronic equipment
US20040252187A1 (en) * 2001-09-10 2004-12-16 Alden Ray M. Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display
US20050073472A1 (en) * 2003-07-26 2005-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax
US20050128353A1 (en) * 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Young Bruce A. System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver
US20050237487A1 (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-10-27 Chang Nelson L A Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging
US20050248561A1 (en) * 2002-04-25 2005-11-10 Norio Ito Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device
US20050259147A1 (en) * 2002-07-16 2005-11-24 Nam Jeho Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal
US20060026090A1 (en) * 2002-12-09 2006-02-02 Sam Balabon System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments
US20060050785A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-09 Nucore Technology Inc. Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream
US7030903B2 (en) * 1997-02-20 2006-04-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same
US20060087556A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Kazunari Era Stereoscopic image display device
US7038698B1 (en) * 1996-02-08 2006-05-02 Palm Charles S 3D stereo browser for the internet
US20060109242A1 (en) * 2004-11-19 2006-05-25 Simpkins Daniel S User interface for impaired users
US20060139448A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes
US20060139490A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-29 Fekkes Wilhelmus F Synchronizing audio with delayed video
US7091471B2 (en) * 2004-03-15 2006-08-15 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices
US7123213B2 (en) * 1995-10-05 2006-10-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display unit and display method
US20060244918A1 (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-02 Actuality Systems, Inc. Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation
US20060256302A1 (en) * 2005-05-13 2006-11-16 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional (3D) image projection
US20060256136A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2006-11-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers
US20060262376A1 (en) * 2005-05-19 2006-11-23 Jonathan Mather Display
US20060271791A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices
US20070002041A1 (en) * 2005-07-02 2007-01-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video
US20070008406A1 (en) * 2005-07-08 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus
US20070008620A1 (en) * 2005-07-11 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Switchable autostereoscopic display
US20070052807A1 (en) * 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras
US7190518B1 (en) * 1996-01-22 2007-03-13 3Ality, Inc. Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing
US20070072674A1 (en) * 2005-09-12 2007-03-29 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Information processing program
US20070085814A1 (en) * 2003-09-20 2007-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Image display device
US20070097208A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2007-05-03 Satoshi Takemoto Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium
US20070096125A1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2007-05-03 Uwe Vogel Illumination device
US20070097103A1 (en) * 2003-09-11 2007-05-03 Shoji Yoshioka Portable display device
US20070139371A1 (en) * 2005-04-04 2007-06-21 Harsham Bret A Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices
US20070146267A1 (en) * 2005-12-22 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Display device and method of driving the same
US20070147827A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Arnold Sheynman Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming
US20070153916A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Wireless video transmission system
US20070153122A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Ayite Nii A Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing
US20070162392A1 (en) * 2006-01-12 2007-07-12 Microsoft Corporation Management of Streaming Content
US20070226258A1 (en) * 2006-03-27 2007-09-27 Thomas Eldred Lambdin Article inspection apparatus
US20070225994A1 (en) * 2006-03-17 2007-09-27 Moore Barrett H Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products
US20070258140A1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2007-11-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiview autostereoscopic display
US20070270218A1 (en) * 2006-05-08 2007-11-22 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus
US20070296874A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-12-27 Fujitsu Ten Limited Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast
US20080025390A1 (en) * 2006-07-25 2008-01-31 Fang Shi Adaptive video frame interpolation
US20080037120A1 (en) * 2006-08-08 2008-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus
US20080043096A1 (en) * 2006-04-04 2008-02-21 Anthony Vetro Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields
US20080043644A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2008-02-21 Microsoft Corporation Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls
US20080068329A1 (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution
US20080086685A1 (en) * 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 James Janky Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device
US7359105B2 (en) * 2006-02-07 2008-04-15 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator and a display device
US20080126557A1 (en) * 2006-09-08 2008-05-29 Tetsuro Motoyama System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices
US20080123182A1 (en) * 2006-11-29 2008-05-29 Honeywell International Inc. Directional display
US20080133122A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2008-06-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US20080150853A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2008-06-26 Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device
US20080165176A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-07-10 Charles Jens Archer Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming
US20080168129A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Jeffrey Robbin Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client
US20080184301A1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2008-07-31 Boylan Peter C Interactive television system with programming-related links
US20080191964A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-08-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images
US20080192112A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2008-08-14 Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product
US20080204550A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2008-08-28 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Stereoscopic Display Apparatus
US20080246757A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2008-10-09 Masahiro Ito 3D Image Generation and Display System
US7440193B2 (en) * 2004-04-30 2008-10-21 Gunasekaran R Alfred Wide-angle variable focal length lens system
US20080259233A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2008-10-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Autostereoscopic Display Device
US20080273242A1 (en) * 2003-09-30 2008-11-06 Graham John Woodgate Directional Display Apparatus
US20080284844A1 (en) * 2003-02-05 2008-11-20 Graham John Woodgate Switchable Lens
US20080303832A1 (en) * 2007-06-11 2008-12-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same
US20090089177A1 (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Helio, Llc Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content
US20090138280A1 (en) * 2007-11-26 2009-05-28 The General Electric Company Multi-stepped default display protocols
US20090244266A1 (en) * 2008-03-26 2009-10-01 Thomas Carl Brigham Enhanced Three Dimensional Television
US20100007582A1 (en) * 2007-04-03 2010-01-14 Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking
US20100128112A1 (en) * 2008-11-26 2010-05-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content
US20100135640A1 (en) * 2008-12-03 2010-06-03 Dell Products L.P. System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content
US20100299390A1 (en) * 2009-05-22 2010-11-25 Rachid Alameh Method and System for Controlling Data Transmission to or From a Mobile Device
US20100309290A1 (en) * 2009-06-08 2010-12-09 Stephen Brooks Myers System for capture and display of stereoscopic content
US20110157322A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US20110234754A1 (en) * 2008-11-24 2011-09-29 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Combining 3d video and auxiliary data
US8174564B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2012-05-08 Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional display device
US8416247B2 (en) * 2007-10-09 2013-04-09 Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment

Family Cites Families (154)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS56109649A (en) 1980-02-05 1981-08-31 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ultrasonic diagnosing device
JPH05122733A (en) 1991-10-28 1993-05-18 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Three-dimensional picture display device
JPH10232626A (en) * 1997-02-20 1998-09-02 Canon Inc Stereoscopic image display device
US6590605B1 (en) 1998-10-14 2003-07-08 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display
US6533420B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2003-03-18 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method for generating and projecting autostereoscopic images
US6591306B1 (en) * 1999-04-01 2003-07-08 Nec Corporation IP network access for portable devices
US8271336B2 (en) 1999-11-22 2012-09-18 Accenture Global Services Gmbh Increased visibility during order management in a network-based supply chain environment
US7389214B1 (en) 2000-05-01 2008-06-17 Accenture, Llp Category analysis in a market management
US6765568B2 (en) * 2000-06-12 2004-07-20 Vrex, Inc. Electronic stereoscopic media delivery system
US6856581B1 (en) 2000-10-31 2005-02-15 International Business Machines Corporation Batteryless, oscillatorless, binary time cell usable as an horological device with associated programming methods and devices
AU2002232928A1 (en) 2000-11-03 2002-05-15 Zoesis, Inc. Interactive character system
DE10103922A1 (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-01 Physoptics Opto Electronic Gmb Interactive data viewing and operating system
US20020194604A1 (en) 2001-06-19 2002-12-19 Sanchez Elizabeth C. Interactive television virtual shopping cart
JP2003322824A (en) * 2002-02-26 2003-11-14 Namco Ltd Stereoscopic video display device and electronic apparatus
JP3738843B2 (en) 2002-06-11 2006-01-25 ソニー株式会社 Image detection apparatus, image detection method, and image detection program
JP2004072202A (en) 2002-08-01 2004-03-04 Ktfreetel Co Ltd Separate billing method of communication utility charge and apparatus therefor
US20080008202A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2008-01-10 Terrell William C Router with routing processors and methods for virtualization
US8799366B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2014-08-05 Broadcom Corporation Migration of stored media through a media exchange network
US8270810B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2012-09-18 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for advertisement insertion and playback for STB with PVR functionality
CA2457602A1 (en) 2003-02-19 2004-08-19 Impatica Inc. Method of synchronizing streams of real time data
US8438601B2 (en) 2003-07-02 2013-05-07 Rovi Solutions Corporation Resource management for a networked personal video recording system
US7557876B2 (en) * 2003-07-25 2009-07-07 Nitto Denko Corporation Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same
GB0326005D0 (en) 2003-11-07 2003-12-10 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Waveguide for autostereoscopic display
US7488072B2 (en) * 2003-12-04 2009-02-10 New York University Eye tracked foveal display by controlled illumination
JP4845893B2 (en) 2004-01-20 2011-12-28 シャープ株式会社 Directional backlight and multi-view display devices
WO2006043721A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-27 Fujitsu Ten Limited Display device
KR100786862B1 (en) 2004-11-30 2007-12-20 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Barrier device, three dimensional image display using the same and method thereof
KR20070091314A (en) * 2004-11-30 2007-09-10 아구라 테크놀로지스, 인코포레이티드 Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers
US20090232202A1 (en) 2004-12-10 2009-09-17 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Wireless video streaming using single layer coding and prioritized streaming
US20090115800A1 (en) 2005-01-18 2009-05-07 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Multi-view display device
JP4600317B2 (en) 2005-03-31 2010-12-15 カシオ計算機株式会社 Illumination device that emits at least two illumination lights having directivity and display device using the same
KR100732961B1 (en) 2005-04-01 2007-06-27 경희대학교 산학협력단 Multiview scalable image encoding, decoding method and its apparatus
RU2322771C2 (en) * 2005-04-25 2008-04-20 Святослав Иванович АРСЕНИЧ Stereo-projection system
KR100661241B1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2006-12-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Fabrication method of optical sheet
WO2007024313A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2007-03-01 Imax Corporation Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays
KR100813961B1 (en) * 2005-06-14 2008-03-14 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of video, and transport stream structure thereof
US9465450B2 (en) 2005-06-30 2016-10-11 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Method of controlling a system
KR100647517B1 (en) 2005-08-26 2006-11-23 (주)마스터이미지 Cell type parallax-barrier and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the same
JP5112326B2 (en) 2005-11-02 2013-01-09 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Optical system for 3D display
US20070110035A1 (en) 2005-11-14 2007-05-17 Broadcom Corporation, A California Corporation Network nodes cooperatively routing traffic flow amongst wired and wireless networks
JP5121136B2 (en) * 2005-11-28 2013-01-16 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイウェスト Image display device, electronic device, portable device, and image display method
KR100688357B1 (en) * 2005-11-30 2007-03-02 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Three-dimensional display device
WO2007072289A2 (en) * 2005-12-20 2007-06-28 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Autostereoscopic display device
US8233034B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-07-31 Reald Inc. Multi-functional active matrix liquid crystal displays
CN100518191C (en) * 2006-03-21 2009-07-22 华为技术有限公司 Method and system for securing service quality in communication network
WO2007117485A2 (en) 2006-04-03 2007-10-18 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Screen sharing method and apparatus
KR100893616B1 (en) 2006-04-17 2009-04-20 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Electronic imaging device, 2d/3d image display device and the driving method thereof
TWI378747B (en) * 2006-08-18 2012-12-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Flexible electronic assembly
US20110090413A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2011-04-21 Industrial Technology Research Institute 3-dimensional image display
US7844547B2 (en) 2006-08-21 2010-11-30 Carl Raymond Amos Uncle gem IV, universal automatic instant money, data and precious metal and stone transfer machine
WO2008038068A1 (en) 2006-09-25 2008-04-03 Nokia Corporation Supporting a 3d presentation
JP4669482B2 (en) * 2006-09-29 2011-04-13 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Display device, image processing method, and electronic apparatus
US20080086391A1 (en) 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 Kurt Maynard Impromptu asset tracking
US8645176B2 (en) 2006-10-05 2014-02-04 Trimble Navigation Limited Utilizing historical data in an asset management environment
US7640223B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2009-12-29 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Method of organizing and presenting data in a table using stutter peak rule
TW200834151A (en) 2006-11-30 2008-08-16 Westar Display Technologies Inc Motion artifact measurement for display devices
JP4285532B2 (en) 2006-12-01 2009-06-24 ソニー株式会社 Backlight control device, backlight control method, and liquid crystal display device
US8248462B2 (en) * 2006-12-15 2012-08-21 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Dynamic parallax barrier autosteroscopic display system and method
JP4686795B2 (en) * 2006-12-27 2011-05-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Image generating apparatus and image reproducing apparatus
US7924456B1 (en) 2007-01-12 2011-04-12 Broadbus Technologies, Inc. Data distribution and buffering
CN101013559A (en) 2007-01-30 2007-08-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 LED brightness control circuit and backlight of LCD
JP4255032B2 (en) 2007-03-15 2009-04-15 富士通テン株式会社 Display device and display method
US7917853B2 (en) 2007-03-21 2011-03-29 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method of presenting media content
US8600932B2 (en) 2007-05-07 2013-12-03 Trimble Navigation Limited Telematic asset microfluidic analysis
GB0709134D0 (en) * 2007-05-11 2007-06-20 Surman Philip Multi-user autostereoscopic Display
GB0709411D0 (en) 2007-05-16 2007-06-27 Barco Nv Methods and systems for stereoscopic imaging
TWI466093B (en) 2007-06-26 2014-12-21 Apple Inc Management techniques for video playback
US20090002178A1 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-01 Microsoft Corporation Dynamic mood sensing
KR101400285B1 (en) * 2007-08-03 2014-05-30 삼성전자주식회사 Front light unit and flat display apparatus employing the same
JP5248062B2 (en) * 2007-08-24 2013-07-31 株式会社東芝 Directional backlight, display device, and stereoscopic image display device
US7911442B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2011-03-22 Au Optronics Corporation Dynamic color gamut of LED backlight
KR101362647B1 (en) 2007-09-07 2014-02-12 삼성전자주식회사 System and method for generating and palying three dimensional image file including two dimensional image
GB2453323A (en) 2007-10-01 2009-04-08 Sharp Kk Flexible backlight arrangement and display
TWI354115B (en) * 2007-10-05 2011-12-11 Ind Tech Res Inst Three-dimensional display apparatus
US8031175B2 (en) 2008-04-21 2011-10-04 Panasonic Corporation Touch sensitive remote control system that detects hand size characteristics of user and adapts mapping to screen display
US8355019B2 (en) * 2007-11-02 2013-01-15 Dimension Technologies, Inc. 3D optical illusions from off-axis displays
JP4956520B2 (en) 2007-11-13 2012-06-20 ミツミ電機株式会社 Backlight device and liquid crystal display device using the same
US8121191B1 (en) 2007-11-13 2012-02-21 Harmonic Inc. AVC to SVC transcoder
KR101439845B1 (en) 2007-11-16 2014-09-12 삼성전자주식회사 Digital image processing apparatus
WO2009067670A1 (en) 2007-11-21 2009-05-28 Gesturetek, Inc. Media preferences
JP5844044B2 (en) 2007-11-21 2016-01-13 クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド Device access control
JP5236938B2 (en) 2007-12-03 2013-07-17 パナソニック株式会社 Digital broadcast receiving apparatus, semiconductor integrated circuit, and digital broadcast receiving method
TWI365302B (en) * 2007-12-31 2012-06-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Stereo image display with switch function between horizontal display and vertical display
US8339333B2 (en) 2008-01-02 2012-12-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display
US20100328440A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2010-12-30 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Autostereoscopic display device
KR101451565B1 (en) 2008-02-13 2014-10-16 삼성전자 주식회사 Autostereoscopic display system
JP5642347B2 (en) 2008-03-07 2014-12-17 ミツミ電機株式会社 LCD backlight device
KR101488199B1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2015-01-30 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for processing and reproducing image, and computer readable medium thereof
US20090238378A1 (en) 2008-03-18 2009-09-24 Invism, Inc. Enhanced Immersive Soundscapes Production
JP4925354B2 (en) 2008-03-31 2012-04-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Image processing apparatus, image display apparatus, imaging apparatus, and image processing method
GB0806183D0 (en) 2008-04-04 2008-05-14 Picsel Res Ltd Presentation of objects in 3D displays
US20090282429A1 (en) * 2008-05-07 2009-11-12 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Viewer tracking for displaying three dimensional views
DE102008001644B4 (en) * 2008-05-08 2010-03-04 Seereal Technologies S.A. Device for displaying three-dimensional images
US20090295791A1 (en) 2008-05-29 2009-12-03 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional environment created from video
CN101291415B (en) 2008-05-30 2010-07-21 华为终端有限公司 Method, apparatus and system for three-dimensional video communication
US20090319625A1 (en) 2008-06-20 2009-12-24 Alcatel Lucent Interactivity in a digital public signage network architecture
TWI401658B (en) 2008-07-18 2013-07-11 Hannstar Display Corp Gate line driving circuit of lcd panel
JP5127633B2 (en) * 2008-08-25 2013-01-23 三菱電機株式会社 Content playback apparatus and method
US20100070987A1 (en) 2008-09-12 2010-03-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Mining viewer responses to multimedia content
JP2010074557A (en) 2008-09-18 2010-04-02 Toshiba Corp Television receiver
CN101861735B (en) 2008-09-18 2013-08-21 松下电器产业株式会社 Image decoding device, image encoding device, image decoding method, image encoding method
KR101497511B1 (en) * 2008-09-19 2015-03-02 삼성전자주식회사 APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING 2 DIMENSIONAL and 3 DIMENSIONAL IMAGE AND VIDEO
KR20100033067A (en) 2008-09-19 2010-03-29 삼성전자주식회사 Image display apparatus and method for both 2d and 3d image
CN102355590B (en) 2008-09-30 2014-11-12 松下电器产业株式会社 Recording medium, playback device, system LSI, playback method, glasses, and display device for 3D images
US20100107184A1 (en) 2008-10-23 2010-04-29 Peter Rae Shintani TV with eye detection
US8752087B2 (en) 2008-11-07 2014-06-10 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method for dynamically constructing personalized contextual video programs
US8103608B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2012-01-24 Microsoft Corporation Reference model for data-driven analytics
US8209396B1 (en) 2008-12-10 2012-06-26 Howcast Media, Inc. Video player
JP5607716B2 (en) 2009-01-07 2014-10-15 トムソン ライセンシング Integrated depth estimation
WO2010095440A1 (en) 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 パナソニック株式会社 Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit
WO2010095381A1 (en) 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 パナソニック株式会社 Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit
US9565397B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2017-02-07 Akamai Technologies, Inc. Deterministically skewing transmission of content streams
US20100225576A1 (en) 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Horizon Semiconductors Ltd. Three-dimensional interactive system and method
US8477175B2 (en) 2009-03-09 2013-07-02 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for providing three dimensional imaging in a network environment
US20100231511A1 (en) 2009-03-10 2010-09-16 David L. Henty Interactive media system with multi-directional remote control and dual mode camera
CN102356638A (en) 2009-03-16 2012-02-15 Lg电子株式会社 A method of displaying three-dimensional image data and an apparatus of processing three-dimensional image data
US20100247080A1 (en) * 2009-03-27 2010-09-30 Kug-Jin Yun Method and apparatus for creating and consuming multiview image media file
JP5695819B2 (en) 2009-03-30 2015-04-08 日立マクセル株式会社 TV operation method
CN102388613B (en) 2009-04-09 2014-04-30 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Media container file management
EP2425302B1 (en) 2009-04-26 2019-03-13 NIKE Innovate C.V. Athletic watch
US8532310B2 (en) 2010-03-30 2013-09-10 Bose Corporation Frequency-dependent ANR reference sound compression
US8315405B2 (en) 2009-04-28 2012-11-20 Bose Corporation Coordinated ANR reference sound compression
US20100280959A1 (en) 2009-05-01 2010-11-04 Darrel Stone Real-time sourcing of service providers
JP4960507B2 (en) 2009-05-15 2012-06-27 株式会社東芝 Video display device and control device
US8704958B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2014-04-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display device and operation method thereof
US9237296B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2016-01-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display apparatus and operating method thereof
EP2442561A4 (en) 2009-06-08 2013-10-16 Lg Electronics Inc Device and method for providing a three-dimensional pip image
US8411746B2 (en) 2009-06-12 2013-04-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiview video coding over MPEG-2 systems
US20100321465A1 (en) 2009-06-19 2010-12-23 Dominique A Behrens Pa Method, System and Computer Program Product for Mobile Telepresence Interactions
KR20120088664A (en) 2009-08-07 2012-08-08 리얼디 인크. Stereoscopic flat panel display with updated blanking intervals
US8976871B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2015-03-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Media extractor tracks for file format track selection
US8446462B2 (en) 2009-10-15 2013-05-21 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Method and system for time-multiplexed shared display
US20110093882A1 (en) 2009-10-21 2011-04-21 Candelore Brant L Parental control through the HDMI interface
KR101600818B1 (en) * 2009-11-06 2016-03-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 3 three dimensional optical module and display device including the same
US8705624B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2014-04-22 STMicroelectronics International N. V. Parallel decoding for scalable video coding
US8335763B2 (en) 2009-12-04 2012-12-18 Microsoft Corporation Concurrently presented data subfeeds
US20110153362A1 (en) 2009-12-17 2011-06-23 Valin David A Method and mechanism for identifying protecting, requesting, assisting and managing information
US8462197B2 (en) 2009-12-17 2013-06-11 Motorola Mobility Llc 3D video transforming device
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US8823782B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US8384774B2 (en) 2010-02-15 2013-02-26 Eastman Kodak Company Glasses for viewing stereo images
US20110199469A1 (en) 2010-02-15 2011-08-18 Gallagher Andrew C Detection and display of stereo images
KR101356248B1 (en) 2010-02-19 2014-01-29 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Image display device
US8964298B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2015-02-24 Microsoft Corporation Video display modification based on sensor input for a see-through near-to-eye display
US9129295B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2015-09-08 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc See-through near-eye display glasses with a fast response photochromic film system for quick transition from dark to clear
US9285589B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2016-03-15 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc AR glasses with event and sensor triggered control of AR eyepiece applications
KR101324412B1 (en) 2010-05-06 2013-11-01 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic image display and driving method thereof
WO2011142141A1 (en) 2010-05-13 2011-11-17 パナソニック株式会社 Display device and image viewing system
KR101255711B1 (en) 2010-07-02 2013-04-17 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 3d image display device and driving method thereof
US8605136B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2013-12-10 Sony Corporation 2D to 3D user interface content data conversion
US8363928B1 (en) 2010-12-24 2013-01-29 Trimble Navigation Ltd. General orientation positioning system
WO2012132797A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Image capturing device and image capturing method
US9424667B2 (en) * 2011-11-21 2016-08-23 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Interface for controlling and improving drilling operations

Patent Citations (116)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4829365A (en) * 1986-03-07 1989-05-09 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask
US5493427A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-02-20 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens
US20030154261A1 (en) * 1994-10-17 2003-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US20040036763A1 (en) * 1994-11-14 2004-02-26 Swift David C. Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments
US5615046A (en) * 1995-01-23 1997-03-25 Cyber Scientific Inc. Stereoscopic viewing system
US6094216A (en) * 1995-05-22 2000-07-25 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method
US6909555B2 (en) * 1995-06-07 2005-06-21 Jacob N. Wohlstadter Three dimensional imaging system
US20040141237A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2004-07-22 Wohlstadter Jacob N. Three dimensional imaging system
US5945965A (en) * 1995-06-29 1999-08-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method
US5959597A (en) * 1995-09-28 1999-09-28 Sony Corporation Image/audio reproducing system
US7123213B2 (en) * 1995-10-05 2006-10-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display unit and display method
US6049424A (en) * 1995-11-15 2000-04-11 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display device
US7190518B1 (en) * 1996-01-22 2007-03-13 3Ality, Inc. Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing
US7038698B1 (en) * 1996-02-08 2006-05-02 Palm Charles S 3D stereo browser for the internet
US6023277A (en) * 1996-07-03 2000-02-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display control apparatus and method
US5855425A (en) * 1996-07-19 1999-01-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Stereoscopic display
US5969850A (en) * 1996-09-27 1999-10-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source
US5990975A (en) * 1996-11-22 1999-11-23 Acer Peripherals, Inc. Dual screen displaying device
US6285368B1 (en) * 1997-02-10 2001-09-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system
US7030903B2 (en) * 1997-02-20 2006-04-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same
US6188442B1 (en) * 1997-08-01 2001-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Multiviewer display system for television monitors
US6710920B1 (en) * 1998-03-27 2004-03-23 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd Stereoscopic display
US6144375A (en) * 1998-08-14 2000-11-07 Praja Inc. Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity
US6697687B1 (en) * 1998-11-09 2004-02-24 Hitachi, Ltd. Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type
US20030012425A1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2003-01-16 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system
US20020171666A1 (en) * 1999-02-19 2002-11-21 Takaaki Endo Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point
US20080184301A1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2008-07-31 Boylan Peter C Interactive television system with programming-related links
US20020010798A1 (en) * 2000-04-20 2002-01-24 Israel Ben-Shaul Differentiated content and application delivery via internet
US20030103165A1 (en) * 2000-05-19 2003-06-05 Werner Bullinger System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance
US20020037037A1 (en) * 2000-09-22 2002-03-28 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability
US20020167862A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-11-14 Carlo Tomasi Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device
US20040252187A1 (en) * 2001-09-10 2004-12-16 Alden Ray M. Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display
US20060256136A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2006-11-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers
US20030137506A1 (en) * 2001-11-30 2003-07-24 Daniel Efran Image-based rendering for 3D viewing
US20030223499A1 (en) * 2002-04-09 2003-12-04 Nicholas Routhier Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences
US20050248561A1 (en) * 2002-04-25 2005-11-10 Norio Ito Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device
US20050259147A1 (en) * 2002-07-16 2005-11-24 Nam Jeho Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal
US20040027452A1 (en) * 2002-08-07 2004-02-12 Yun Kug Jin Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture
US20040041747A1 (en) * 2002-08-27 2004-03-04 Nec Corporation 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device
US20040239231A1 (en) * 2002-10-30 2004-12-02 Keisuke Miyagawa Display device and electronic equipment
US20040109093A1 (en) * 2002-12-05 2004-06-10 Small-Stryker Aaron Tug Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts
US20060026090A1 (en) * 2002-12-09 2006-02-02 Sam Balabon System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments
US7769668B2 (en) * 2002-12-09 2010-08-03 Sam Balabon System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments
US20080284844A1 (en) * 2003-02-05 2008-11-20 Graham John Woodgate Switchable Lens
US20040164292A1 (en) * 2003-02-21 2004-08-26 Yeh-Jiun Tung Transflective display having an OLED backlight
US20070097208A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2007-05-03 Satoshi Takemoto Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium
US20050073472A1 (en) * 2003-07-26 2005-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax
US20070097103A1 (en) * 2003-09-11 2007-05-03 Shoji Yoshioka Portable display device
US20070085814A1 (en) * 2003-09-20 2007-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Image display device
US20080273242A1 (en) * 2003-09-30 2008-11-06 Graham John Woodgate Directional Display Apparatus
US20050128353A1 (en) * 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Young Bruce A. System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver
US7091471B2 (en) * 2004-03-15 2006-08-15 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices
US20050237487A1 (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-10-27 Chang Nelson L A Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging
US7440193B2 (en) * 2004-04-30 2008-10-21 Gunasekaran R Alfred Wide-angle variable focal length lens system
US20060050785A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-09 Nucore Technology Inc. Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream
US20070296874A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-12-27 Fujitsu Ten Limited Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast
US20060087556A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Kazunari Era Stereoscopic image display device
US20060109242A1 (en) * 2004-11-19 2006-05-25 Simpkins Daniel S User interface for impaired users
US20060139490A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-29 Fekkes Wilhelmus F Synchronizing audio with delayed video
US20060139448A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes
US20080192112A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2008-08-14 Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product
US20070139371A1 (en) * 2005-04-04 2007-06-21 Harsham Bret A Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices
US20080191964A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-08-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images
US20080246757A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2008-10-09 Masahiro Ito 3D Image Generation and Display System
US20060244918A1 (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-02 Actuality Systems, Inc. Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation
US20080204550A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2008-08-28 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Stereoscopic Display Apparatus
US20060256302A1 (en) * 2005-05-13 2006-11-16 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional (3D) image projection
US7671935B2 (en) * 2005-05-19 2010-03-02 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display
US20060262376A1 (en) * 2005-05-19 2006-11-23 Jonathan Mather Display
US20060271791A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices
US20070096125A1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2007-05-03 Uwe Vogel Illumination device
US20070002041A1 (en) * 2005-07-02 2007-01-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video
US20070008406A1 (en) * 2005-07-08 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus
US20070008620A1 (en) * 2005-07-11 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Switchable autostereoscopic display
US20070052807A1 (en) * 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras
US20070072674A1 (en) * 2005-09-12 2007-03-29 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Information processing program
US8174564B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2012-05-08 Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional display device
US20080259233A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2008-10-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Autostereoscopic Display Device
US20070146267A1 (en) * 2005-12-22 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Display device and method of driving the same
US20070147827A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Arnold Sheynman Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming
US20070153916A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Wireless video transmission system
US20070153122A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Ayite Nii A Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing
US20070162392A1 (en) * 2006-01-12 2007-07-12 Microsoft Corporation Management of Streaming Content
US7359105B2 (en) * 2006-02-07 2008-04-15 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator and a display device
US20070225994A1 (en) * 2006-03-17 2007-09-27 Moore Barrett H Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products
US8368749B2 (en) * 2006-03-27 2013-02-05 Ge Inspection Technologies Lp Article inspection apparatus
US20070226258A1 (en) * 2006-03-27 2007-09-27 Thomas Eldred Lambdin Article inspection apparatus
US20080133122A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2008-06-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US20080043096A1 (en) * 2006-04-04 2008-02-21 Anthony Vetro Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields
US20070258140A1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2007-11-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiview autostereoscopic display
US20070270218A1 (en) * 2006-05-08 2007-11-22 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus
US20080025390A1 (en) * 2006-07-25 2008-01-31 Fang Shi Adaptive video frame interpolation
US20080037120A1 (en) * 2006-08-08 2008-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus
US20080043644A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2008-02-21 Microsoft Corporation Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls
US20080126557A1 (en) * 2006-09-08 2008-05-29 Tetsuro Motoyama System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices
US20080068329A1 (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution
US20080165176A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-07-10 Charles Jens Archer Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming
US20080086685A1 (en) * 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 James Janky Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device
US20080123182A1 (en) * 2006-11-29 2008-05-29 Honeywell International Inc. Directional display
US20080150853A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2008-06-26 Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device
US20080168129A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Jeffrey Robbin Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client
US20100007582A1 (en) * 2007-04-03 2010-01-14 Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking
US8269822B2 (en) * 2007-04-03 2012-09-18 Sony Computer Entertainment America, LLC Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking
US20080303832A1 (en) * 2007-06-11 2008-12-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same
US20090089177A1 (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Helio, Llc Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content
US8416247B2 (en) * 2007-10-09 2013-04-09 Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment
US20090138280A1 (en) * 2007-11-26 2009-05-28 The General Electric Company Multi-stepped default display protocols
US20090244266A1 (en) * 2008-03-26 2009-10-01 Thomas Carl Brigham Enhanced Three Dimensional Television
US20110234754A1 (en) * 2008-11-24 2011-09-29 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Combining 3d video and auxiliary data
US20100128112A1 (en) * 2008-11-26 2010-05-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content
US20100135640A1 (en) * 2008-12-03 2010-06-03 Dell Products L.P. System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content
US20100299390A1 (en) * 2009-05-22 2010-11-25 Rachid Alameh Method and System for Controlling Data Transmission to or From a Mobile Device
US8788676B2 (en) * 2009-05-22 2014-07-22 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and system for controlling data transmission to or from a mobile device
US20100309290A1 (en) * 2009-06-08 2010-12-09 Stephen Brooks Myers System for capture and display of stereoscopic content
US20110157322A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US20110157327A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking

Cited By (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-07-01 Broadcom Corporation Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-12-01 Broadcom Corporation User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-09-22 Broadcom Corporation Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-24 Broadcom Corporation Display with elastic light manipulator
US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-04-01 Broadcom Corporation Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-04-21 Broadcom Corporation Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US8823782B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US20110164115A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-03-24 Broadcom Corporation Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-09-01 Broadcom Corporation Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-12-30 Broadcom Corporation Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-06-23 Broadcom Corporation Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2018-05-22 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2017-05-16 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US20110164188A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-04-28 Broadcom Corporation Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-06-02 Broadcom Corporation Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US20120249872A1 (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-10-04 Sony Corporation Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method
US8912986B2 (en) * 2011-07-06 2014-12-16 Sony Corporation Display control device, display control method, and computer program
US20130009921A1 (en) * 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Sony Corporation Display control device, display control method, and computer program
US20150042557A1 (en) * 2012-03-07 2015-02-12 Sony Corporation Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
US8842169B2 (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-09-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof
US20140362196A1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-12-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof
US20140036044A1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-02-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof
TWI510813B (en) * 2013-06-18 2015-12-01 Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions
US20160237030A1 (en) * 2013-10-12 2016-08-18 Zhejiang Hisun Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Synthetic intermediate of maxacalcitol, preparation method therefor and use thereof
US20170148488A1 (en) * 2015-11-20 2017-05-25 Mediatek Inc. Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data
US10802324B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-10-13 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Double vision display method and device
CN113383540A (en) * 2019-01-23 2021-09-10 奥崔迪合作公司 Interoperable 3D image content processing
CN113453939A (en) * 2019-02-12 2021-09-28 株式会社日本显示器 Display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20110157168A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US8767050B2 (en) 2014-07-01
EP2346021B1 (en) 2014-11-19
US8922545B2 (en) 2014-12-30
US9654767B2 (en) 2017-05-16
TW201142357A (en) 2011-12-01
US8988506B2 (en) 2015-03-24
US20110157257A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157330A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157170A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157167A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157327A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157339A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110161843A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110164111A1 (en) 2011-07-07
TWI467234B (en) 2015-01-01
US20110157336A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157697A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9979954B2 (en) 2018-05-22
CN102183841B (en) 2014-04-02
US20110157315A1 (en) 2011-06-30
EP2357508A1 (en) 2011-08-17
US20110157696A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9124885B2 (en) 2015-09-01
HK1161754A1 (en) 2012-08-03
US20110157264A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9019263B2 (en) 2015-04-28
TW201137399A (en) 2011-11-01
US20110164115A1 (en) 2011-07-07
US9204138B2 (en) 2015-12-01
US20110169930A1 (en) 2011-07-14
US20110157172A1 (en) 2011-06-30
EP2346021A1 (en) 2011-07-20
CN102215408A (en) 2011-10-12
TW201142356A (en) 2011-12-01
US9143770B2 (en) 2015-09-22
US20150156473A1 (en) 2015-06-04
US9013546B2 (en) 2015-04-21
EP2357631A1 (en) 2011-08-17
EP2357630A1 (en) 2011-08-17
US20150264341A1 (en) 2015-09-17
US20110157471A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US8687042B2 (en) 2014-04-01
US8964013B2 (en) 2015-02-24
US9066092B2 (en) 2015-06-23
US20110164034A1 (en) 2011-07-07
US20110157309A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110169913A1 (en) 2011-07-14
CN102183840A (en) 2011-09-14
CN102183841A (en) 2011-09-14
US20110157169A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9049440B2 (en) 2015-06-02
US20150015668A1 (en) 2015-01-15
US20110157322A1 (en) 2011-06-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20110157326A1 (en) Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery
US8854531B2 (en) Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US9247286B2 (en) Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
CN102256146B (en) 3-D image display device and driving method thereof
US6252707B1 (en) Systems for three-dimensional viewing and projection
US11095872B2 (en) Autostereoscopic 3-dimensional display
US9035943B1 (en) Multi-view image display apparatus and multi-view image display method thereof
TW201404118A (en) Auto-stereoscopic display device and drive method
CN105430369A (en) Autostereoscopic 3d display device
US20130127816A1 (en) Display apparatus and driving method thereof
KR102208308B1 (en) Dispaly apparatus and controlling method thereof
US10715792B2 (en) Display device and method of controlling the same
KR102143463B1 (en) Multi view image display apparatus and contorl method thereof
CN107580211B (en) Automatic stereo 3 ties up display
US20120081513A1 (en) Multiple Parallax Image Receiver Apparatus
KR102232462B1 (en) Autostereoscopic 3d display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH CAROLINA

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001

Effective date: 20160201

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001

Effective date: 20160201

AS Assignment

Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001

Effective date: 20170120

Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001

Effective date: 20170120

AS Assignment

Owner name: BROADCOM CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS;ASSIGNOR:BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:041712/0001

Effective date: 20170119

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION